030130 Concrete Canopy Repair - San Franciscomission.sfgov.org/OCA_BID_ATTACHMENTS/FA31229.pdf ·...

Arup HPSY: Building 813 LMS Project No.: 1007

May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 030130-1 Concrete Canopy Repair

SECTION 030130

CONCRETE CANOPY REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies an outline repair approach for the existing concrete canopies around the building perimeter. In particular, this Section addresses canopies on the North, South and West faces of the building.

B. Two types of repair are addressed: 1. Repair of cracks. 2. Repair of areas where concrete material has been lost from original design

dimensions.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Detailed repair procedure. Contractor shall produce a written description of the methods to be used for review prior to carrying out the work. This document shall clearly state where deviations are proposed to the approach outlined herein.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including ICC-ES reports.

C. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.

D. Minutes of pre-execution conference.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards: 1. ACI 224.1R, “Causes, Evaluation and Repair of Cracks in Concrete Structures.” 2. ACI 503R, “Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete.” 3. ACI 504R, “Guide to Sealing Joints in Concrete Structures.” 4. ACI 546R, “Concrete Repair Guide.” 5. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 6. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections1 through 5.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength

Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician – Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician – Grade II.



D. Testing Agency: Shall be selected and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise specified; re-testing paid for by the Contractor.

E. Contractor’s Quality Control Plan: Quality Control includes the functions performed by the Contractor to ensure that the material and workmanship of concrete construction meets the project specifications and applicable standards. The Contractor shall submit a Quality Control Plan that addresses all inspection issues, including testing and inspection per ACI. The verification testing and inspection carried out by the Testing Agency does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for conducting their own quality control/inspection program to ensure the requirements of the Contract Documents have been met. The Contractor’s Quality Control Plan will be reviewed by the Testing Agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products

specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, unless noted otherwise. 2. Alkali content shall not exceed 0.6% when tested in accordance with ASTM C114. 3. The temperature of cement delivered to the plant shall not exceed 150 degrees F.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33, Class 2N coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Coarse Aggregate:

a. Maximum Size: 3/8 inch nominal, unless noted otherwise. b. Minimum Specific Gravity: 2.65. c. Aggregate shall contain no thin or elongated pieces. Any piece having a major

dimension more than 2-1/2 times the average thickness shall be considered thin or elongated.

2. Fine Aggregate: Uniformly graded, clean sand, free from excessive fines, organic materials or other deleterious materials. Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C94, clean, free from deleterious matter.

2.3 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.



B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.

C. Waterproofing Membrane Sealers: Epoxy or urethane surface treatments capable of bridging small cracks and suitable for application thicknesses of at least 0.7mm. Available products: 1. Dural 335, by Euclid Chemical Company 2. Sikafloor 265, by Sika Corporation

2.4 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Injection Resin: Suitable for low-pressure injection into fine cracks. Available Products: 1. Eucopoxy, by Euclid Chemical Company 2. Sikadur 52, by Sika Corporation

B. Cementitious Patching Mortar: Suitable for patching of larger damaged areas. Available manufacturers: 1. Eucocrete, by Euclid Chemical Company 2. Monotop 615, by Sika Corporation

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING:

A. Contractor shall conduct a meeting at project site to review repair approach prior to executing the work. Meeting shall be attended by representatives for the Contractor, Architect and Engineer. Meeting shall include the following: 1. Walk-through of canopies, to review typical areas requiring repair. 2. Discussion of methods to be used for each typical condition.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prior to Work specified in this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of other trades and verify that such Work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

B. Discrepancies: 1. Notify the Architect of any discrepancies or inconsistencies. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until such discrepancies have

been fully resolved.

C. Cleaning of surfaces: All canopy surfaces shall be free of dust, laitance, oil, grease, paint or other debris prior to initiation of repair work. Sandblasting or another suitable method may be used.

3.3 CRACK IDENTIFICATION AND PREPARATION

A. All cracks that have exhibited efflorescence or rust staining shall be identified for further treatment.



B. At each identified crack, concrete material along both sides of the crack shall be inspected for soundness. Unsound material shall be removed by a method that does not introduce microcracking in remaining material. ACI 546R-04 Chapter 2 may be used as a guideline for acceptable concrete removal methods.

C. After removal of unsound material, the crack width shall be measured. The “reference crack width” shall be defined as the minimum width measured within the middle half of the crack length.

3.4 REPAIR OF CRACKS

A. Cracks having a reference width greater than 0.5mm shall be repaired by epoxy injection or by another method approved in writing by the Engineer.

B. Epoxy injection shall meet the following requirements: 1. Prior to injection, cracks shall be cleaned of contaminants or loose material by

flushing with water or other cleaning solution. 2. The guidelines of ACI 503R-93 Section 7.2.5 shall be followed. 3. Guidelines of the epoxy manufacturer shall be followed.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION AND REPAIR OF LARGER DAMAGED AREAS

A. A Larger damaged area consists of any area where original design dimensions of the concrete element have been reduced by more than ½ inch or cover to reinforcement has been reduced to less than 1 ¼ inch due to concrete damage. Such areas shall be patched.

B. Prior to patching damaged concrete, the area shall be thoroughly cleaned: 1. All loose or unsound concrete shall be removed. 2. If reinforcement is exposed, concrete shall be removed with at least ¾-inch clearance

all around the exposed bar.

C. A bonding resin shall be applied if required by the patching material manufacturer.

D. A cementitious patching mortar shall be applied at identified repair areas. Manufacturer instructions shall be followed.

3.6 WATERPROOFING

A. All top surfaces of the exterior canopies shall be coated with a waterproofing membrane sealer of at least 0.7mm thickness.

B. Manufacturer instructions shall be followed for preparation of surfaces and application of sealer.

C. Minimum surface preparation: 1. All defective concrete shall be routed to sound material. Voids shall be patched with a

cementitious patching mortar. 2. Surface shall be roughened by sandblasting or other suitable means. 3. Surface shall be cleaned of laitance, dust, dirt, oil, coatings and other contaminants. 4. Surface shall be allowed to dry completely.

END OF SECTION 030130


May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 054000-1 Cold Formed Metal Framing

SECTION 054000

COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Non-load bearing interior wall framing.

1.2 STANDARDS

A. Reference the most current edition of the following standards.

B. AISI SG02-3 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute

C. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

E. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society.

F. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society.

G. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, and with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. All welding shall be performed by operators who are qualified for the types of welds used. Each operator shall have been qualified as described in AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3, as applicable.

C. Require welders to retake qualification test if, as determined by the Architect, there is a reasonable doubt as to the proficiency of the welder. If the welder does not requalify they shall not be employed on this Project

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 1 Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Manufacturer's literature describing products including manufacturer's installation procedures.

C. Submit complete fabrication and erection drawing for review and obtain acceptance from the Architect prior to proceeding. Show type and location of each connection and framing



member, the connection to adjacent construction, location, and framing for each type of opening.

D. Certifications: Submit certifications that metal framing members proposed meet structural requirements specified. Submit color code key or other means used by manufacturer for designating gauge and structural characteristics of each component.

E. Mill Reports: Submit copies of mill test reports verifying grade of steel for each heat supplied.

F. Review of shop drawing is of a general nature only, and responsibility for conformance with intent of Drawings shall remain with the Contractor. Review does not imply or state that fabricator has correctly interpreted the Drawings.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the project site with manufacturers' labels intact and legible.

B. Products shall be protected from conditions that may cause physical damage.

C. Materials shall be stored on a flat plane.

D. Damaged materials shall promptly be removed from the job site.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Framing Components: 1. Studs, track and miscellaneous members: Fabricated from ASTM A653 SS Grade 33

sheet (Fy=33 ksi). 2. Gage and dimensions: As indicated on the drawings. 3. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M G90/Z275 coating.

B. Bridging: 1-1/2 inch cold-rolled channels 475 pounds per 1000 lineal feet, coated.

C. Zinc-rich paint.

D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. Provide Hilti Kwik-Pro by Hilti, Inc., or approved equal.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307.

C. Welding Electrodes: As permitted by AWS D1.3, min. E60XX Electrodes.



D. Powder Driven Fasteners: Hilti type DX fasteners by Hilti, Inc., or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

B. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies

have been fully resolved.

3.2 ERECTION

A. General: 1. As a minimum erect all components and systems as per manufacturer's

recommendations and ASTM C 1007 requirements. 2. Splices members only where indicated on the Drawings or where accepted by the

Architect. 3. Cut members only as provided for on the drawings. Repair damaged members as

directed.

B. All framing components shall be cut squarely or on an angle as in bracing to fit squarely against abutting members.

C. Temporary Bracing: 1. Members shall be held firmly in position until properly fastened. 2. Temporary bracing shall be adequate to protect the Work against damage due to

construction loads, and to brace the incomplete structure against wind and seismic forces.

3. Use special care when erecting floors, roofs and walls which depend on the final sheathing to insure member stability.

D. Cutting: 1. Cutting of steel framing members may be accomplished with a saw or shear. Torch

cutting of members is not permitted. 2. Do not notch, bore, or cut members for pipes, ducts, conduits, or other reasons

except as shown on the Drawings or as specifically approved in advance. 3. All framing components shall be cut squarely or on an angle as in bracing to fit

squarely against abutting members.

E. Walls: 1. Track shall be securely anchored to the supporting structure as shown on the

Drawings. 2. When tracks or joists bear on concrete provide uniform and level bearing by means

of shims or grout. 3. Unless otherwise detailed, install continuous track at top and bottom of all wall

framing. 4. At track butt joints, abutting pieces of track shall be securely anchored to a common

structural element, or they shall be butt-welded or spliced together.



5. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned and securely attached to the flange or webs of both upper and lower tracks.

6. Wall studs shall be installed seated squarely. Studs shall be no more than 1/16-inch from web of track against the web portion of the top and bottom tracks.

7. Install all studs single length, unspliced and platform framed. 8. All Vertical studs shall be aligned with the studs, joists, beams and headers below.

Vertical webs shall align. 9. At corners of framed wall provide three studs minimum located so as to provide

surfaces for attachment of all interior and exterior facings. 10. Jack studs or cripples shall be installed below window sills, above window and door

heads, at free-standing stair rails and elsewhere to furnish support, and shall be securely attached to supporting members.

11. Wall stud bridging shall be installed where studs do not have gypsum wall board or plywood sheathing attached to both flanges. Bridging shall be attached in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Bridging rows shall be spaced according to the manufacturer's recommendation. Without supportive data, the minimum bridging shall be 3 feet 4 inches on center.

12. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures, mechanical or electrical items anchored to walls.

3.3 FASTENINGS AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Securely fasten framing members together.

B. Anchorage to concrete may proceed only after the concrete has reached the design strengths.

C. Welds shall conform to the requirements of AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, and AISI Manual Section 4.2. All welds shall be touched-up using zinc rich paint for galvanized members, and paint similar to that used by the manufacturer for painted member.

D. Self-drilling, self-tapping screws shall be of the minimum diameter indicated by the design of that particular attachment detail. Penetration through joined materials shall not be less than three exposed threads.

E. Powder driven fasteners to be installed with guide washers to control penetration and shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Wire tying is not permitted except as specifically detailed.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Vertical alignment (plumbness) of studs shall be within 1/960th (1/8-inch in 10 feet, 0 inches) of the span.

B. Horizontal alignment (levelness) of wall shall be within 1/960th (1/8-inch in 10 feet, 0 inches) of their respective lengths.

C. Spacing of studs shall not be more than ±1/8-inch from the designed spacing providing that the cumulative error does not exceed the requirements of the finishing materials.

D. Squareness: prefabricated panels shall not be more than 1/8-inch out of square within the length of that panel.



3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. As a minimum, all testing and inspection as per the requirements of California Code of Regulations, Title 24.

B. Welding Inspections: Inspections of shop and field welding operations during welding performance, as follows: 1. Verify that welders are certified. 2. Inspect every weld for quality and conformance. 3. Make systematic record of all welds, including:

a. Location and type of weld. b. Identification marks of welders. c. List of defective welds. d. Manner of correction of defects.

4. Check materials, equipment and procedures.

C. Powder Driven Fasteners: Proof test.


HPSY: Building 813 LMS Project No.: 1007

May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 06 10 53 - 1 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry

SECTION 06 10 53

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


A. Fire retardant treated plywood backboards at electrical and meter rooms.

B. Fire retardant treated plywood door bucks, wood blocking, cants, nailers, crickets.

C. Fire retardant treated plywood blocking/backing for support of accessories, wall mounted cabinetry, finish carpentry, and plastic paneling (where sheet metal not used).

D. Fire retardant treated coped parapet cap nailers.

E. Fire retardant treated pipe and duct support curbs and bases where required at rooftop locations.

F. Preservative treatment and fire-retardant treatment of wood materials.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 075100 – Built-up Bituminous Roofing

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NFPA: National Forest Products Association, National Design Specification for

Stress Grade Lumber. 2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture

content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

2. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.



B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 2. Power-driven fasteners. 3. Powder-actuated fasteners. 4. Expansion anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors.


A. Lumber Grades: Provide visible grade stamp of an agency certified by NFPA.

B. Lumber Standard: Comply with US Product Standard PS20 for each indicated use, including moisture content and actual sizes related to nominal sizes indicated.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is enclosed and weatherproof.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade

stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.

3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking and backing. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of the following species. 1. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.



C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or

WWPA.

D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades: 1. Western woods, Standard or No. 3 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.3 PLYWOOD

A. Plywood Sheathing: Provide minimum APA C-D exterior (CDX) plywood; stress rated where spanning between supporting members; fire retardant treated; minimum ¾ inch thick unless otherwise noted.

2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Lighting and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness. 1. Do not paint backing panels.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacturer. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Nails: ASTM F1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A (ASTM F568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.



H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

2.6 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.

2.7 PRESSURE TREATMENT OF WOOD

A. Preservative pressure treat lumber and plywood with water-borne preservatives to comply with AWPA C2 and C9, respectively, and with requirements indicated below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements.

B. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection

with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in

contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.

C. Pressure-treat wood members in contact with the ground or fresh water with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf.

D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.

2.8 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT OF WOOD

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Pressure impregnate lumber and plywood where indicated with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27; identify "fire-retardant-treated wood" with appropriate classification marking of UL, Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Interior Wood and Plywood: AWPA C20 and C27, Type A, identified with FRTW. 2. Exterior Types: Where indicated for exterior applications, provide fire-treated wood

passing ASTM D2898 rain test.

B. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated for interior locations.

C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

D. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Roof construction. 3. Plywood backing panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA) "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections

where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) oc.

F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

H. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel

Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's Uniform Building Code.

I. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish



materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Provide bucks and nailers where required for installations by other trades.

B. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

C. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.

B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-63-mm actual-) size furring horizontally at 24 inches (610 mm) 600 mm oc.

3.4 PLYWOOD

A. Comply with recommendations of American Plywood Association (APA) for fabrication and installation of plywood work.

END OF SECTION 06 10 53


May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 07 21 00-1 Thermal Insulation

SECTION 07 21 00

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Insulation in the following types: 1. Batt thermal building insulation. 2. Rigid insulation at roof. 3. Fire safing insulation.


A. Section 075100 – Built-up Bituminous Roofing.

B. Section 078400 – Firestopping.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of insulation product specified.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by sprayed foam insulation system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. 1. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff and training to install

materials, products and equipment per the specified requirements with a minimum of five years of experience with a record of successful in service performance on projects of similar scope and scale

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.




A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS FIBER INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. 1. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:

a. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.

b. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.

B. Blanket Glass Fiber Insulation: Provide glass fiber and resinous binders formed into flexible blankets conforming to ASTM C665, Type lll, Class A, with a density not less than 1.5 lbs./cu.ft. and an R-value of 3.17 per inch of thickness at 75 deg F mean temperature, with foil reinforced Kraft paper vapor barrier laminated to one face. Minimum of 25% recycled content. Formaldehyde-free. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville b. CertainTeed c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.

2. R-Value: a. Exterior Walls: R-19

3. Flame Spread/Smoke Development Rating: Maximum 200/450, ASTM E84.

2.2 RIGID INSULATION

A. Rigid Insulation: 1. At Roof: A combination of rigid expanded polystyrene insulation adhered to nailable

roof board materials. Insulation assembly shall be built up to slopes and elevations shown in drawings. The following system alternates are acceptable: a. Basis of Design: Johns Manville Enrgy 3 rigid roof insulation or equivalent.

1) Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2. 2) Coverboard: Johns Manville Fesco Board.

b. CertainTeed c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.

B. Attachment: Types as recommended by insulation manufacturer for type of installation indicated.

2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION

A. Mineral Wool Insulation: U.S.G. “Thermafiber Safing,” Fibrex “Safing Insulation,” or approved semi-rigid mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C612, Class 5, and which has passed ASTM E119 (melt at over 2000 deg. F.). 1. Thermal Insulation Installation: Install in thickness as indicated on Drawings. 2. Fire Safing Installation: Insulation shall be of thickness required to maintain fire rating

of assembly in which it is applied. Density, minimum 4 pounds per cubic foot.



3. Provide all steel safing clips or sheet metal closures as required and/or detailed.

2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation or mechanical anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging or corroding insulation, anchors, or substrates.

B. Staples: Steel wire; type and size to suit application.

C. Tape: Mesh reinforced, self-adhering type, 2-inch wide designed to maintain vapor barrier integrity.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory.

B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation.

C. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested.

D. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation.

B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.

D. Install in exterior walls, roof, and soffit spaces where indicated, without gaps or voids.

E. Install for sound attenuation in interior walls, above toilet room ceilings, and over suspended ceilings where indicated, without gaps or voids.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF BATT INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Glass-Fiber and Mineral Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If

more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic

spaces at vented eaves. 5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm),

support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by stapling paper flanges to flanges of metal studs.

C. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in insulation membrane.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF RIGID INSULATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Apply insulation units to substrates by method complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

D. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4-inch (6 mm) with insulation.

E. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4-inch (6 mm) of projections and penetrations.

F. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

G. Install one or more layers of insulation to cover area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 1-1/2-inches (38 mm) or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6-inches (150 mm) in each direction.

H. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

I. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.



J. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum of 6-inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. Tape joints if required by roofing system manufacturer.

K. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: 1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive

according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated.

2. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.

3. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to physical abuse and other causes.

B. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 07 27 29-1 Underlayments

SECTION 07 27 29

UNDERLAYMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Provide underlayments and flashings for the following applications, with related concealed metal flashings and accessories as required for complete watertight installation: 1. Underlayment (SASM): Self adhering vapor permeable sheet membrane (SASM)

moisture barrier system over plywood wall, roof and soffit sheathing and behind or under the following exterior finishes: a. Aluminum plate panel system b. Metal panels. c. Sheet metal roofing assemblies.

2. Flexible Flashing (SASF): Various types of self adhering vapor impermeable sheet membrane flashing (SASF) at the following locations: a. Penetrations through underlayment at exterior finishes and systems. b. Terminations of underlayment. c. Window and door openings. d. Sheet metal flashing transitions at wall and roof locations. e. Other locations as detailed and any location where required for a complete

watertight building system finish installation.


A. Section 07 41 00 – Metal Panels

B. Section 07 60 00 – Flashing and Sheet Metal

C. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants

D. Section 08 40 00 – Entrances and Storefront

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide continuous underlayments without gaps or holes where indicated on Drawings.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. 1. Include installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations. 2. Include certification of data indicating VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) content of

all components of the waterproofing system.



B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected. 1. Underlayments and Flashings: 12-inches (300 mm) square for each type..

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for waterproofing.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

F. Product Certificates: Product manufacturer’s written certification of compatibility that underlayment material and accessory materials are compatible with flashing and other materials that come in contact with the barrier.


A. Manufacturer: Underlayment and flashing systems shall be manufactured and marketed by a firm with a minimum of 20 years experience in the production and sales of self-adhesive sheet membrane waterproofing. Manufacturers proposed for use, but not named in these specifications shall submit evidence of ability to meet all requirements specified, and include a list of projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past 5 years.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is a certified installer, approved or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project: Minimum of 5 years. 1. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff and training to install


C. Perform Work in accordance with Sealant and Waterproofer's Institute - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification requirements for installation.

D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of underlayment material from single source providing consistent quality in performance and appearance without delaying progress of the Work.

E. Mockups: Incorporate specified underlayments where indicated when constructing mockups of exterior sheathing components.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to review requirements for waterproofing, including surface preparation specified under other Sections, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 1. Refer to Section 01315 Project Meetings


A. Protect underlayment materials from puncture damage prior to use.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for handling and storage, and protection during installation.




A. Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits established by the manufacturer of the materials and products used.

B. Proceed with installation only when substrate construction and preparation work is complete and in condition to receive underlayments and flashings.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide for correcting failure of underlayments and flashings to resist penetration of water, except where failures are result of structural failures of building. Temperature induced movement and building material shrinkage is not considered structural failure. 1. Repair underlayments and flashings and pay for or replace damaged materials and

surfaces. 2. Special Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Grace Construction Products. 2. Fortifiber Building Systems Group. 3. Polyken. 4. CertainTeed. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Self adhering sheet membrane (SASM) underlayment impermeable to vapor, moisture and air transference: 40-mil self-adhered, self-sealing waterproofing membrane consisting of 0.036 in. of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 0.004 in. high density cross laminated polyethylene film; 24-inch and 36-inch rolls: 1. Basis of Design: Perm-A-Barrier Wall Membrane manufactured by Grace

Construction Products. a. Air Permeance, ASTM E2178: Not to exceed 0.0002 cfm/sq. ft. under pressure

differential of 0.3 inch water (1.57 psf). b. Assembly Air Permeance, ASTM E2357: Not to exceed 0.0008 dfm/sq. ft.

under a pressure differential of 0.3 inch water (1.57 psf). c. Water Vapor Permeance, ASTM E96: Not less than 0.05 perms. d. Water Resistance, AATCC D5034: 55 lbf MD, and 44 lbf MD.

B. Self Adhering Sheet Membrane Flashing (SASF) at locations where flexible flashing is required and where no sealant contacts membrane surface: Self-adhesive, cold-applied composite sheet, consisting of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to a polyethylene film, with a disposable silicone-treated release sheet; 4-inch, 6-inch, 9-inch and 12-inch wide rolls as required. No special adhesive or heat shall be required to form laps. 1. Basis of Design:

a) 25 mil membrane thickness where noted and where build-up of flashings and underlayments results in constructability issues: Grace Construction Products



Vycor Plus (25 mil thick); 4-inch, 6-inch, 9-inch, 12-inch or 18-inch wide rolls as required.

b) Alternate approved 25 mil membrane: Fortifiber Building Systems Group, FortiFlash 25 Waterproof Flashing Membrane

C. Foil Faced Self Adhering Sheet Membrane Flashing (Aluminized SASF) at locations where sealant will be in contact with flashing surface (i.e. storefront systems, etc.): Self-adhesive, cold-applied aluminum faced composite sheet with an overall thickness of 0.035 in./ 35 mil (0.89 mm) , consisting of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to a aluminum foil facing, with a disposable polyethylene release sheet; 4-inch, 6-inch, 9-inch and 12-inch wide rolls. No special adhesive or heat shall be required to form laps. 1. Basis of Design: Polyken, Foilastic Premium Flashing Tape 626-35

D. Membrane Tape: Polyethylene pressure sensitive, self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2-inch (25 mm) wide, compatible with underlayment for repairs to underlayments during installation. 1. Grace Construction Products: Preprufe Tape.

E. Building Paper Underlayment: FS UU-B-790, Type 1, Grade D, Style 2 vapor permeable, 60 minute building paper conforming with CBC Standard 14-1. 1. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Jumbo Tex.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer for Underlayments and Flashings: As recommended by manufacturer. 1. Prime all areas of substrate where sheet membrane underlayments and flashings are

to be applied.

B. Miscellaneous Materials: Mastic, liquid membrane, tape, bond breaker tape, termination bars and accessories specified or acceptable to manufacturer of sheet membrane underlayments and flashings.

C. Staples for Building Paper: Provide galvanized exterior grade staples, meeting FS FFN-105, in sufficient length to hold paper to substrate without movement as lath and plaster or other systems are applied.

2.4 PENETRATIONS AND TERMINATION SEALANT

A. Liquid membrane for Details and Terminations: Bituthene Liquid Membrane manufactured by Grace Construction Products: a two-part, elastomeric, trowel grade material designed for use with self-adhered membranes and tapes; 10 g/L max. VOC content.

B. Substrate Patching Membrane: Bituthene Liquid Membrane manufactured by Grace Construction Products: a two-part, elastomeric, trowel grade material designed for use with self-adhered membranes and tapes; 10 g/L max VOC content.

C. Joint Sealant: Refer to sealant manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify required condition of substrate and adjacent construction with installer present. Make any corrections before proceeding with underlayment installation.

B. Do not proceed with installation of underlayments until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with installation indicates acceptance of substrate.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Substrate: 1. Ensure that the sheathing panels or other substrate materials are sufficiently

stabilized with corners and edges fastened with appropriate screws in accordance with exterior sheathing manufactures written instructions.

2. Fill voids, gaps and spalled areas in substrate to provide an even plane. Use repair materials and methods which are acceptable to manufacturer of underlayments and flashings.

3. Remove loose or foreign matter that might impair adhesion.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install underlayment materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for recommendations on installation, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Apply primer with applicator and at the rate recommended by manufacturer. Recoat

areas not waterproofed if contaminated by dust. Mask and protect adjoining exposed finish surfaces to protect those surfaces from excessive application of primer.

2. Delay application of membrane until primer is completely dry. Dry time will vary with weather conditions.

3. Seal daily terminations with troweled bead of mastic.

C. At changes in substrate plane, apply approved sealant or underlayment manufacturer’s liquid membrane at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one place to another for underlayment 1. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult

manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. See Section 079200 for field adhesion test requirements.

D. Form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for underlayment.

E. Seal penetrations of pipe and conduit with tape to ensure an airtight seal. Seal tears and punctures with tape immediately before proceeding with covering the vapor retarder. Use a second layer of underlayment material where damage to underlayment is extensive and would require excessive use of tape to repair.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SELF-ADHERING SHEET MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT

A. Install SASM underlayment materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Overlap membrane layers at all locations, including all penetrations, terminations, openings and flashings.



B. Seal tears and penetrations of pipe and conduit with membrane tape and sealant to ensure an airtight seal. Use a second layer of underlayment material where damage to underlayment is extensive and would require excessive use of tape or sealant to repair.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF WINDOW, DOOR AND OTHER OPENING FLASHINGS

A. Sill Flashing: Attach flashing flush along the bottom of the rough opening where indicated on Drawings. So that a weather-resistive barrier may be slipped up underneath the flashing in a weather-board fashion do not fasten the lower edge of the flashing, or ensure that weather-resistive barrier is in place before fastening. Extend the sill flashing a minimum of 3-inches beyond the jamb flashings to be applied later. Carry flashing into opening. 1. Install sheet metal pan flashing or other trim where detailed on drawings.

B. Jamb Flashings: Apply flashings vertically to each side of opening, extending beyond sill flashing already in place, and above location where head flashing will intersect with vertical flashings. Leave bottom of jamb flashings free, or ensure that weather-resistive barrier is in place before fastening. Carry flashing into opening. 1. Install sheet metal pan flashing or trim where detailed on drawings.

C. Head Flashing: Install flashing to the head of the opening, extending beyond the jamb flashings a minimum of 2-inches. Carry flashing into opening.

D. Install sheet metal pan flashing, trim flashing, aluminum plate flashing, window, louver, etc. as detailed and according to manufacturer’s instructions and as detailed. Apply a continuous 3/8-inch bead of flashing sealant to the perimeter of the rough opening before installing flashing, trim or unit where detailed.

E. Apply additional sheet flashing where detailed on drawings, lapping and overlapping to ensure a watertight seal at window perimeter.

F. Where flashing is to directly receive sealant, utilize flashing specified for application.


A. Protect installed underlayments from damage by harmful weather exposure, and other construction activities.

B. Do not permit adjacent Work to damage Work of this Section.



May 2013: Permit/Bid 07 41 00 - 1 Metal Panels

SECTION 07 41 00

METAL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The extent of panel system work is indicated on the drawings and in these specifications.

B. Panel system requirements include the following components:

1. Aluminum faced composite panels with mounting system. Panel mounting system including anchorages, shims, furring, fasteners, gaskets and sealants, related flashing adapters, and masking (as required) for a complete watertight installation.


A. Section 05 40 00: Cold-Formed Metal Framing

B. Section 07 27 29: Underlayments

C. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Composite Panel Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the manufacturing of this product.

B. Composite Panel Manufacturer shall be solely responsible for panel manufacture and application of the finish.

C. Fabricator/installer shall be acceptable to the composite panel manufacturer.

D. Fabricator/Installer shall have a minimum 5 years experience of metal panel work similar in scope and size to this project.

E. Field measurements should be taken prior to the completion of shop fabrication whenever possible. However, coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed by the Contractor to avoid delay of work. Field fabrication may be allowed to ensure proper fit. However, field fabrication shall be kept to an absolute minimum with the majority of the fabrication being done under controlled shop conditions.

F. Shop drawings shall show the preferred joint details providing a watertight and structurally sound wall panel system that allows no uncontrolled water penetration on the inside face of the panel system as determined by ASTM E 331. Systems not utilizing a construction sealant at the panel joints shall provide a means of concealed drainage with baffles and weeps for water which may accumulate in members of the system.

G. Maximum deviation from vertical and horizontal alignment of erected panels: 6mm (1/4") in 6m (20') non-accumulative.

H. Fabricator/installer shall assume undivided responsibility for all components of the exterior panel system including, but not limited to attachment to sub-



construction, panel to panel joinery, panel to dissimilar material joinery, and joint seal associated with the panel system.

I. Composite panel manufacturer shall have established a Certification Program acceptable to the local Code Authorities.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Aluminum Association 1. AA-C22-A41: Anodized - Clear Coatings. 2. AA-C22-A42: Anodized - Integral Color Coatings.

B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association

1. AAMA 508-05: Voluntary Test Method and Specification for Pressure Equalized Rain Screen Wall Cladding Systems

C. American Society for Testing and Materials

1. E 330 Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under the Influence of Wind Loads

2. E 283 Rate of Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors

3. D 1781 Climbing Drum Peel Test for Adhesives 4. E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 5. D 3363 Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test 6. D 2794 Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid

Deformation (Impact) 7. D 3359 Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test 8. D 2247 Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100%

Relative Humidity 9. B 117 Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing 10. D 822 Practice for Operating Light and Water Exposure Apparatus

(Carbon- Arc Type) for Testing Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products

11. D 1308 Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes

12. D 1735 Method for Water Fog Testing of Organic Coatings. 13. D 1929 Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of

Plastics 14. D 635 Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time

of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be in conformance with Section 01330.

B. Samples

1. Metal Panel System Assembly: Two samples of each type of assembly. 304mm (12") x 304mm (12") minimum.

2. Two samples of each color or finish selected, 76mm (3") x 102mm (4") minimum.

C. Shop Drawings

Submit shop drawings showing project layout and elevations; fastening and anchoring methods; detail and location of joints, sealants, and gaskets, including joints necessary to accommodate thermal movement; trim; flashing; and accessories.



D. Mock-ups: Provide mock-up of metal panels as indicated and required by

Section 01330.1.08.G- Field Samples and Mock-ups.

E. Affidavit certifying material meets requirements specified.

F. Two copies of manufacturer's literature for panel material.

G. Code Compliance Submit documents showing product compliance with the national and local building code. These documents shall include, but not be limited to, appropriate Evaluation Reports and/or test reports supporting the use of the product.

H. Alternate materials must be approved by the architect prior to the bid date.

1.06 PRE INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel assemblies including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and

inspecting agency representative, and installers whose work interfaces with.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review mockup procedures, location of mockup and protection procedures after completion of approved mockup.

4. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members.

6. Review flashings, special metal panel details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that will affect metal panel.

7. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant.


A. Protect finish and edges in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Store material in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANELS

A. Panels- Rout and Return Wet

1. Basis of Design: ALUCOBOND material manufactured by 3A Composites USA, Inc. 208 West 5th Street, Benton, KY 42025 (800-626-3365 or 270-527-4200).



2. REYNOBOND material manufactured by Alcoa Architectural Products. 50 Industrial Blvd., Eastman, GA 31023 (800-841-7774 or 478-374-4746).

3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.

B. Thickness: 4mm (0.157")

C. Product Performance 1. Bond Integrity

When tested for bond integrity, in accordance with ASTM D1781 (simulating resistance to panel delamination), there shall be no adhesive failure of the bond a) between the core and the skin nor b) cohesive failure of the core itself below the following values: 1) Peel Strength: 115 N mm/mm (22.5 in lb/in) as manufactured 115 N mm/mm (22.5 in lb/in) after 21 days soaking in water at 70°F

2. Fire Performance ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Index must be less than 25, Smoke Developed Index must be less than 450. ASTM D 1929 A self ignition temperature of 650oF or greater ASTM D-635 Requires a CC1 classification

D. Finishes

1. Coil coated KYNAR® 500 or HYLAR® 5000 based Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) in conformance with the following general requirements of AAMA 2605. 1) Color:

a. Custom Fade-Resistant to be selected by Architect. 2) Coating Thickness:

a. Colors: 1.0 mil (±0.2 mil). b. Clear: 0.50 mil (± 0.05 mil).

3) Hardness: ASTM D-3363; HB minimum using Eagle Turquoise Pencil.

4) Impact: a. Test method: ASTM D-2794; Gardner Variable Impact Tester

with 5/8" mandrel. b. Coating shall withstand reverse impact of 1.5"/pounds per mil

substrate thickness. c. Coating shall adhere tightly to metal when subjected to #600

Scotch Tape pick-off test. Slight minute cracking permissible. No removal of film to substrate.

5) Adhesion: a. Test Method: ASTM D-3359. b. Coating shall not pick off when subjected to an 11" x 11" x 1/16"

grid and taped with #600 Scotch Tape. 6) Humidity Resistance

a. Test Method: ASTM D-2247. b. No formation of blisters when subject to condensing water fog at

100% relative humidity and 100°F for 4000 hours. 7) Salt Spray Resistance:

a. Test Method: ASTM B-117; Expose coating system to 4000 hours, using 5% NaCl solution.

b. Corrosion creepage from scribe line: 1/16" max. c. Minimum blister rating of 8 within the test specimen field.

8) Weather Exposure



a. Outdoor: 1) Ten-year exposure at 45° angle facing south Florida

exposure. 2) Maximum color change of 5 Delta E units as

calculated in accordance with ASTM D-2244. 3) Maximum chalk rating of 8 in accordance with ASTM

D-4214. 4) No checking, crazing, adhesion loss.

9) Chemical Resistance: a. ASTM D-1308 utilizing 10% Muriatic Acid for an exposure time of

15 minutes. No loss of film adhesion or visual change when viewed by the unaided eye.

b. ASTM D-1308 utilizing 20% Sulfuric Acid for an exposure time of 18 hours. No loss of film adhesion or visual change when viewed by the unaided eye.

c. AAMA 2605 utilizing 70% reagent grade Nitric Acid vapor for an exposure time of 30 minutes. Maximum color change of 5 Delta E units as calculated in accordance with ASTM D-2244.

2. Urethane Coating: For small quantity aluminum accent panels or custom color applications, provide a multi coat urethane finish in accordance with the paint manufacturer's requirements.

2.02 COMPOSITE PANEL FABRICATION

A. Composition: Two sheets of aluminum sandwiching a solid core of extruded thermoplastic material formed in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. The core material shall be free of voids and/or air spaces and not contain foamed insulation material. Products laminated sheet by sheet in a batch process using glues or adhesives between materials shall not be acceptable.

B. Aluminum Face Sheets: Thickness: 0.50mm (0.0197") (nominal) Alloy: AA3000 Series (Painted material)

C. Panel Weight: 1. 4mm (0.157"): 1.12 lbs./ft²

D. Tolerances

1. Panel Bow: Maximum 0.8% of any 1828mm (72”) panel dimension. 2. Panel Dimensions: Field fabrication shall be allowed where necessary,

but shall be kept to an absolute minimum. All fabrication shall be done under controlled shop conditions when possible.

3. Panel lines, breaks, and angles shall be sharp, true, and surfaces free from warp and buckle.

4. Maximum deviation from panel flatness shall be 1/8" in 5'0" on panel in any direction for assembled units. (Non-accumulative - No Oil Canning)

E. System Characteristics

1. Plans, elevations, details, characteristics, and other requirements indicated are based upon standards by one manufacturer. It is intended that other manufacturers, receiving prior approval, may be acceptable,



provided their details and characteristics comply with size and profile requirements, and material/performance standards.

2. System must not generally have any visible fasteners, telegraphing or fastening on the panel faces or any other compromise of a neat and flat appearance.

3. System shall comply with the applicable provisions of the "Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Storefront, and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual" by AAMA and ANSI/AAMA 302.9 requirements for aluminum windows.

4. Fabricate panel system to dimension, size, and profile indicated on the drawings based on a design temperature of 70°F.

5. Fabricate panel system so that no restraints can be placed on the panel, which might result in compressive skin stresses. The installation detailing shall be such that the panels remain flat regardless of temperature change and at all times remain air and water tight.

6. The finish side of the panel shall have a removable plastic film applied prior to fabrication, which shall remain on the panel during fabrication, shipping, and erection to protect the surface from damage.

F. System Type

1. Rout and Return Wet: System must provide a wet seal (caulked) reveal joint as detailed on drawings. The sealant type shall be as specified in Section 07 92 00 and with foamed type backer rod as indicated on architectural drawings.

G. System Performance

1. Composite panels shall be capable of withstanding building movements and weather exposures based on the following test standards required by the Architect and/or the local building code.

1) Wind Load

If system tests are not available, mock-ups shall be constructed and tests performed under the direction of an independent third party laboratory, which show compliance to the following minimum standards: Panels shall be designed to withstand the Design Wind Load based upon the local building code, but in no case less than 20 pounds per square foot (psf) and 30 psf on parapet and corner panels. Wind load testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM E330 to obtain the following results. Normal to the plane of the wall between supports, deflection of the secured perimeter-framing members shall not exceed L/175 or 3/4", whichever is less. Normal to the plane of the wall, the maximum panel deflection shall not exceed L/60 of the full span. Maximum anchor deflection shall not exceed 1/16". At 1-1/2 times design pressure, permanent deflections of framing members shall not exceed L/100 of span length and components shall not experience failure or gross permanent distortion. At



connection points of framing members to anchors, permanent set shall not exceed 1/16".

2) Air/Water System Test

If system tests are not available, mock-ups shall be constructed and tests performed under the direction of an independent third party laboratory, which show compliance to the following minimum standards: Air Infiltration - When tested in accordance with ASTM E283, air infiltration at 1.57 psf must not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft² of wall area. Water Infiltration - Water infiltration is defined as uncontrolled water leakage through the exterior face of the assembly. Systems not using a construction sealant at the panel joints (i.e. Rout and Return Dry and Rear Ventilated Systems) shall be designed to drain any water leakage occurring at the joints. No water infiltration shall occur in any system under a differential static pressure of 6.24 psf after 15 minutes of exposure in accordance with ASTM E331.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Extrusions, formed members, sheet, and plate shall conform with ASTM B209 and the recommendations of the manufacturer.

B. Panel stiffeners, if required, shall be structurally fastened or restrained at the ends and shall be secured to the rear face of the composite panel with silicone of sufficient size and strength to maintain panel flatness. Stiffener material and/or finish shall be compatible with the silicone.

C. Sealants and gaskets within the panel system shall be as per manufacturer's standards to meet performance requirements.

D. Fabricate flashing materials from 0.030" minimum thickness aluminum sheet painted to match the adjacent curtain wall / panel system where exposed. Provide a lap strap under the flashing at abutted conditions and seal lapped surfaces with a full bed of non-hardening sealant.

E. Fasteners (concealed/exposed/non-corrosive): Fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer. Do not expose fasteners except where unavoidable and then match finish of adjoining metal.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from defects detrimental to work. Notify contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Surfaces to receive panels shall be structurally sound as determined by a registered Architect/Engineer.

C. Wall Substrate: Confirm that wall substrate is within tolerances acceptable to metal wall panel system manufacturer.



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Erect panels plumb, level, and true.

B. Attachment system shall allow for the free and noiseless vertical and horizontal thermal movement due to expansion and contraction for a material temperature range of -20°F to +180°F. Buckling of panels, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners, failure of sealants or any other detrimental effects due to thermal movement will not be permitted. Fabrication, assembly, and erection procedure shall account for the ambient temperature at the time of the respective operation.

C. Panels shall be erected in accordance with an approved set of shop drawings.

D. Anchor panels securely per engineering recommendations and in accordance with approved shop drawings to allow for necessary thermal movement and structural support.

E. Conform to panel fabricator's instructions for installation of concealed fasteners.

F. Do not install component parts that are observed to be defective, including warped, bowed, dented, abraised, and broken members.

G. Do not cut, trim, weld, or braze component parts during erection in a manner which would damage the finish, decrease strength, or result in visual imperfection or a failure in performance. Return component parts which require alteration to shop for refabrication, if possible, or for replacement with new parts.

H. Separate dissimilar metals and use gasketed fasteners where needed to eliminate the possibility of corrosive or electrolytic action between metals.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace panels damaged beyond repair as a direct result of the panel installation. After installation, panel repair and replacement shall become the responsibility of the General Contractor.

B. Repair panels with minor damage.

C. Remove masking (if used) as soon as possible after installation. Masking intentionally left in place after panel installation on an elevation, shall become the responsibility of the General Contractor.

D. Any additional protection, after installation, shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor.

E. Make sure weep holes and drainage channels are unobstructed and free of dirt and sealants.

F. Final cleaning shall be part of the work of this section.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 07 51 00-1 Built-up Bituminous Roofing

SECTION 07 51 00

BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Cool roof membrane roofing, base flashings, pipe and vent flashings, cant strips, walk pads, coatings and all accessories required for a complete system.


A. Section 061053 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers, cants, curbs, and blocking.

B. Section 072100 – Thermal Insulation: Rigid insulation for installation with roofing system.

C. Section 076000 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Counter flashing and copper sheet metal roofing.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Built-up Roofing System: Four-ply asphalt membrane system consisting of a base sheet covered by two plies of asphalt coated glass fiber felt and a mineral cap sheet, applied with hot asphalt. 1. Roof system must incorporate all aspects of roof waterproofing. When partial roofing

is done, complete area separations must be used.

B. System shall be rated Class A by Underwriters' Laboratories.


A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Jobsite Safety: Execute all operations and provide a safe work environment in accordance to OSHA standards and regulations. This requirement applies to all contractor personnel, associated subcontractors, workers in other trades, and jobsite visitors. 1. Follow all industry fire prevention guidelines for storage of materials, staging areas,

roof access, and application means and methods. 2. Any applicable local fire codes supersede industry guidelines.



D. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FMG's “RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. 1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A 90

E. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products. 1. Also include material data indicating non rounded emissivity value when tested in

accordance with ASTM E408. a. Required Solar Reflective Index: 93.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish the following with bid documents: 1. Proposed start date, and number of working days to complete installation. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions for items not specified. 3. When required, performance and payment bond from Surety equal to the full amount

of the contract. Add the cost of this bond to the roofing subcontract.

B. Substitutions of materials or variance from specifications must be approved prior to bid date. Submittals of substitutions must be received by Architect 5 days minimum prior to bid date.

C. Approved variances will be supplied to all bidders in writing by Architect a minimum of 3 days prior to bid date. Bids for other than specified materials will not be considered without approval.

D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. 1. For asphalt bitumen, provide label on each container or certification with each load of

bulk bitumen, indicating flash point (FP), finished blowing temperature (FBT), softening point (SP) and equiviscous temperature (EVT).

2. Energy Star certification 3. Solar Reflectance rating

E. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.

G. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. 1. Include continuous log showing time and temperature for each load of bulk asphalt,

indicating date obtained from manufacturer, where held, and how transported before final heating and application on roof.

H. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system installation meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1. Provide an Asphalt Confirmation Number indicating that the asphalt was registered

with an approved asphalt source.



2. Indicate that bulk roofing asphalt materials delivered to Project comply with requirements. Include quantity and statistical and descriptive data for each product. Submit certificate with each load before it is used.

I. Research/Evaluation Reports: Meeting current model code organization for components of roofing system.

J. Pre-Roofing Conference: Submit copies of pre-roofing conference records.

K. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.

L. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation.

M. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Perform Work in accordance with most current edition of the NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A nationally recognized, qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for built-up roofing identical to that used for this Project, and having a minimum of 5 years continuous service manufacturing roofing products of the type specified.

C. Single Source: Obtain primary built-up roofing products, including roofing sheets (felts); bitumen, composition flashings, and vapor barrier from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm with not less than ten (10) years of successful experience in installation of roofing systems similar to those required for this project and which is acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing materials, and licensed in the State of California. 1. Obtain written certification from manufacturer of roofing stating that installer is an

approved applicator of roofing system. 2. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff and training to install

materials, products and equipment per the specified requirements with a minimum of ten years of experience with a record of successful in service performance on projects of similar scope and scale

E. UL Listing: Provide labeled materials which have been tested and listed by UL in "Building Materials Directory" for application indicated, with "Class A" rated materials/system for roof slopes shown. 1. Provide roof covering materials bearing Classification Marking (UL) on bundle,

package or container indicating that materials have been produced under UL's Classification and follow-up Service.

1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. - Building Materials Directory, "Built-up Roof Covering Materials" and "Roof Deck Construction", latest edition with current supplements.

B. California Building Code - Chapter 15 and Appendix Chapter 15, latest edition.



1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene a pre-installation conference one week prior to commencing work of this section. Conduct conference at Project site. Conference shall be attended by Contractor, City Representative, Architect, City's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer and his foreman, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer and his foreman, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

B. Agenda shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Review preparation, methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including

manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss

condition of substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

3. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

5. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

6. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 7. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 8. Examine roof and flashing details for conflicts with manufacturer's specifications. 9. Review code conflicts with UL or other regulatory requirements. 10. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable. 11. Establish trade-related job schedules, including installation of roof mounted

equipment. 12. Establish schedules and work methods which will prevent roof damage. 13. Coordinate penetrations, curbs and walls on roof to be in place prior to roof

installation. 14. Designation of area on job site to be used as work and storage location. 15. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with

unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing (if not a mandatory requirement).

16. Enact provisions for monitoring roof installation after completion and prior to acceptance of entire project.

17. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 18. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting

procedures. 19. Other business relating to Work.

C. Where changes to any previously agreed-upon conditions are desired, the party requesting the change shall give written notice regarding the desired change to all involved parties. Make such requests through the Contractor to the Architect.


A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original unopened containers, dry, undamaged, with seals, labels, and UL listing mark (where applicable) intact. Ensure EVT data is stenciled on each bitumen container.

B. Obtain accompanying manufacturer's certificate clearly stating the type, quality, and softening point of bitumen. Maintain material in a manner so as not to alter their properties.



C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture, on wood or other clean rigid pads to prevent adherence of foreign materials.

D. Stack rolls of felt and composition flashing membrane on end atop properly protected wood pallets, covered with canvas tarpaulin. Maintain at a temperature of 50 degrees F, or higher, for 24 hours minimum prior to application.

E. Apply only dry materials. Do not leave open or uncovered material on roof overnight. Remove wet material from the job site.

F. Do not permit construction materials or equipment to be used or stored in such a manner as to damage decking or completed roofing.

1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F.

B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface, when precipitation is occurring, or fog is present.

C. Do not apply wet materials to deck surface.

D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day.

1.12 PROTECTION

A. Protect building from damage by roofing operations. Prevent bitumen from running into and clogging roof drains and rainwater leaders.

B. Remove construction debris daily and leave entire premises clean.

C. Contractor shall immediately correct damage to building or landscaping by roofing subcontractor; clean up asphalt drips and spills.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of built-up roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Special warranty includes built-up roofing membrane, base flashings, roof insulation,

fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, roofing accessories, and other components of built-up roofing.

2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Installer’s Guarantee: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.



1.14 SAFETY

A. Material handling and application, and associated equipment shall conform to and be operated in accordance with OSHA safety requirements.

B. Provide sufficient, filled and operating fire extinguishers, meeting current code standards at the job site at all times during roofing operations. Maintain extinguishers on the roof whether hot asphalt operations are in progress or not, for prevention of fires due to use of gasoline in base sheet fastening and other uses.

C. Work shall comply with all local, state, and federal fire and safety regulations. Equipment and materials shall be situated in such a manner as to preclude any danger, disturbance, fire hazard, or interference to public safety and traffic.

D. Work shall be scheduled to prevent any unnecessary traffic over the new roofing. Where such traffic is unavoidable, roofs shall be protected with plywood runways. Existing and newly completed roofs shall not be used to stockpile materials or debris.

E. Kettles shall be equipped with smoke afterburners in good operating condition and confirming to state air pollution control standards.

F. Bitumen Heating: Do not raise the temperature above the minimum normal fluid-holding temperature more than one hour prior to time of application. Discard bitumen which has been held at an elevated temperature (as required for application) for a period exceeding 3 hours. 1. Do not heat bitumen above the temperature required to ensure that the application

viscosity results in adequate mopping weight and maximum adhesion to substrates. 2. Determine the flash point of the bitumen, either by information from the bitumen

producer or by suitable tests, and determine the maximum fire-safe handling temperature, and do not exceed that temperature in heating bitumen; but in no case heat bitumen to a temperature higher than 25 deg. F. below the flash point.

G. Ensure asphalt kettles are continuously attended by experienced personnel during roofing operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Roof Material: Energy Star compliant and have a non-rounded emissivity value of at least 0.9 when tested in accordance with ASTM E408.

B. Roof Material: With initial Solar Reflectance Index not less than 93 when calculated according to ASTM E1980.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Bituminous Roofing Materials: 1. The Celotex Corporation. 2. Johns-Manville Corporation, Manville Building Materials Corp. 3. Certainteed. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.



2.3 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Base Sheet: ASTM D4601, Type II, non-perforated, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber sheet, weighing not less than 25 pounds per 100 sq ft, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.

B. Glass Fiber Felts: ASTM D2178, Type IV; asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt.

C. Cap Sheet: ASTM D3909, cool roof mineral cap sheet, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, , with white coarse mineral-granule top surfacing and fine mineral surfacing on bottom surface. 1. Reflectivity: 0.76.

2.4 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312, Type III; Trumball Asphalt, San Joaquin Refineries, or Ridgeline Asphalt.

B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41; material from selected roofing materials manufacturer product line or approved equal.

C. Plastic Cement: ASTM D2822 Type I, cutback asphalt type; material from selected roofing materials manufacturer product line, or compatible, approved equal.

D. Flashing Cement: ASTM D2822, Type II; as supplied by the roof membrane manufacturer if available; if not available provide "Black Jack Heavy Fibrated Flashing Cement No. 6283", or other heavy flashing cement as approved by Architect.

2.5 FLASHINGS

A. Composition Flashing: ASTM D6164, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; produced by same manufacturer as built-up membrane and suitable for application method specified, with white granule color. Apply with hot-mopped asphalt only.

B. Flashing Tape: "Calpico", 10 mil PVC tape or approved equal.

C. Webbing: Cotton/nylon or fiberglass.

D. Metal Pipe Jack Collars and Vent Flashings: Fabricated according to SMACNA guidelines, galvanized steel, 24 gage minimum.

2.6 CANTS

A. Fiber Cant and Tapered Edge Strips: Perlite, fiberglass or molded asphalt or coal tar impregnated organic fiber insulation material, preformed to 45 degree angle; at roof parapet walls, skylights, and other vertical edges where indicated on Drawings; 4-inch high (5-inch face) minimum. Use 3-inch high cants only where clearance will not permit a 4-inch cant. Miter corners and tightly butt joints.

B. Provide tapered edge strips at drain sumps, sloped 1/2-inch per ft minimum.



2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Base Ply Mechanical Fasteners : SENCO Fastening System or Berryfast Tapefast. Staple spacing shall comply with manufacturer's requirements to achieve Factory Mutual Class I90 standard for wind uplift.

B. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot-dipped or non-ferrous type, squarehead ringshank stronghold nails, 11 gage; length to penetrate 1/2-inch through perimeter wood nailers spaced at 6-inches oc.

C. Caulking: Sikaflex-1A, or approved equal.

D. Walkpads: Slip-resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, 1/2-inch (13 mm) thick minimum.

E. Coating: 100% Acrylic elastomeric reflective coating directly adhered to built-up roof surface; color to match built-up roof and SRI values. 1. Base Coat: Bleed blocking base coat applied directly over asphalt emulsion and built-

up roof systems: JM TopGard Base Coat, or equal. 2. Top Coat: Reflective top coat applied over base coat; ASTM 6083: JM TopGard 4000

or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. 2. Verify deck is supported and secure. 3. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections,

properly sloped to drains and gutters, and suitable for installation of roof system. 4. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of frost, snow, and ice. Confirm dry deck by

electro-capacitance meter measurements with 18 percent moisture maximum allowed.

5. Verify that there are no areas where ponding may occur.

B. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION - GENERAL

A. Sweep deck to remove loose particles and debris. Clean substrate of dust, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.



C. Prime concrete and block walls, curbs, and other vertical surfaces to receive composition flashing membrane using not less than 1 gallon of asphalt primer per 100 sq ft and allow primer to dry. Follow manufacturer's directions.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. See Section 072100.

3.4 MEMBRANE APPLICATION

A. Install built-up roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing."

B. Install roofing system BU-I-A-G4-M, according to specification-plate classifications in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" and requirements in this Section.

C. Heat asphalt to fall within the Equiviscous Temperature (EVT) range, plus or minus 25 deg F, of the type of asphalt being used, at the point of application. Do not raise roofing asphalt temperature above EVT range more than one hour before time of application. Do not exceed roofing asphalt manufacturer's recommended temperature limits during roofing asphalt heating.

D. Do not heat asphalt within 25 deg F of the actual COC Flash Point, nor heat and hold above the Finished Blowing Temperature (FBT) for more than 4 hours. Discard roofing asphalt maintained at a temperature exceeding FBT for more than 4 hours. Follow safety procedures specified in this Section.

E. Determine temperature with a separate thermometer. Integral thermometer with kettle(s) will not be recognized.

F. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction.

G. Prior to application of field plies, apply an extra felt to valleys and crickets. Extend out of valleys a minimum 12-inches up from centerline of inclines. Set plies in a uniform mopping of asphalt at rate recommended by manufacturer.

H. Assure good adhesion between substrate and members when temperature drops below 40 deg. F. Provide the following precautions: 1. No overheating of bitumen to compensate for rapid chilling is permitted. 2. Insulate buckets to carry hot bitumen. 3. Manual mopping no farther than 5 ft. in front of the felt rolls, and immediate unrolling

of felts. 4. Immediate application of top pour and aggregate, before stored heat in the

membrane dissipates. 5. Below 32 deg. F., store felts in a warm enclosure or pre-heat felts before application.

I. Unroll base ply and permit to relax prior to application. Secure ply to plywood decking with mechanical fasteners according to manufacturer's instructions. Keep ply smooth and taut.



J. Install one lapped course of base sheet, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants. Attach base sheet to insulated steel deck by adhering to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.

K. Carry felts up cant strips to vertical surfaces and secure to nailing strips and reglets.

L. Install two ply sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheets without stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants. 1. Work toward area where base materials are fastened to the roof deck (to minimize

traffic over newly applied roofing). 2. Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at rate

required by roofing system manufacturer, to form a uniform membrane without ply sheets touching.

M. Roll ply felts and broom in; flopping of felts is not permitted. Apply felt in full coat of hot asphalt without air pockets, sharkfins, wrinkles, fishmouths, or tears. Strictly adhere to manufacturer's instructions for staggering side and end laps. Shingle in direction to shed water.

N. Weigh down all membrane edges left incomplete before splicing with other sections of membrane.

O. Embed aggregate where bleed-out is beyond 1/2-inch and where other mishaps occur, while the asphalt is still warm.

P. Material handling equipment shall be selected and operated so as not to damage existing construction or applied roofing. Soft rubber and inflatable tires only are permissible. Drum type felt machines shall not be used.

Q. Provide enveloping of perimeter felts to prevent bitumen drippage onto other surfaces.

R. Do not apply hot bitumen under any condition that would cause foaming. Test substrate for excessive moisture by pouring one pit of steep asphalt at 400 deg. F. on the deck, at the start of each day's work, and at the start of each roof area or place. Substrate is too wet if test sample foams or can be easily (cleanly) stripped after cooling.

S. Set on Accessories: Where small roof accessories are set on built-up roofing membrane, set metal flanges in a bed of roofing cement, and seal penetration of membrane with bead of roofing cement to prevent flow of bitumen form membrane.

T. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing membrane sheets are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. 1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane

sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed.

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system.

3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

U. Cap Sheet: 1. Install lapped granulated cap sheet starting at low point of roofing system.



2. Offset laps from laps of preceding ply sheets and align cap sheet without stretching. Lap in direction to shed water.

3. Extend cap sheet over and terminate beyond cants. 4. Embed cap sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at rate required by

roofing system manufacturer.

3.5 CURB INSTALLATIONS

A. Equipment Support Curb Detail/Air Handling Station: Install in accordance with NRCA BUR-13. 1. Minimum curb height is 8-inches above finished roof height. Prime vertical surfaces

at rate recommended by manufacturer and allow to dry. 2. Set cant in bitumen. Run all field plies over cant a minimum of 2-inches. 3. Install base flashing ply covering curb set with 6-inches on to field of the roof. 4. Feather subsequent flashing plies over the base flashing ply, 8-inches minimum onto

the field of the roof. Attach top of membrane to top of curb and nail at 8-inches oc. 5. Install sheet metal counterflashing over completed ply installation with gasketed

fasteners, minimum 2 fasteners per side. 6. Apply continuous bed of sealant around top perimeter of curb. 7. Install pre-fabricated equipment support flashing. Ensure base of unit extends a

minimum of 1/2-inch (13 mm) beyond top of curb. Fasten sides at 24-inches oc with fasteners and neoprene washers. Furnish all joint cover laps with butyl tape between metal covers.

8. Set equipment on neoprene pad and fasten as required by equipment manufacturer.

3.6 COMPOSITION FLASHINGS

A. Composition Flashing and Stripping: Provide composition flashing at cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, and at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof. Nail or provide other forms of mechanical anchorage of composition flashing to vertical surfaces, as recommended by manufacturer of primary roofing materials. Except where concealed by elastic flashing, apply a heavy coating of roofing cement over composition flashing.

3.7 METAL FLASHINGS

A. Install metal flashings that are an integral part of the roofing simultaneously during application. Coordinate the work of other trades with the requirements under this Section to avoid omissions and delays.

B. Prior to installation, prime top and bottom surfaces of metal scheduled to be incorporated into the roofing system.

C. Install metal and lead flashings on top of completed roof membrane. 1. Prime flanges of flashings with asphalt primer and embed in a uniform layer roofing

cement over the roof membrane and nail 4-inches oc in a staggered pattern, before installation of cap sheet.

2. Strip in flanges with two additional felts set in asphalt. 3. Set cap sheet over completed assembly.

D. Apply flashing tape where pipe jack collar meets plumbing. Do not use mastic or flashing band tape.

E. Do not use pitch pans in lieu of proper flashings.



F. Ensure roofing installation, including metal flashings and accessories installed by other trades, is suitable to receive required warranty.

3.8 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION

A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer. 2. Backer Sheet Application: Install backer sheet and adhere to substrate in a solid

mopping of hot roofing asphalt. 3. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in a solid mopping of

hot roofing asphalt applied at not less than 425 deg F (218 deg C). Apply hot roofing asphalt to back of flashing sheet if recommended by roofing system manufacturer.

B. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing as detailed on Drawings.

C. Install stripping, according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, where metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofing. 1. Install stripping of not less than 2 roofing membrane ply sheets, setting each ply in a

continuous coating of asphalt roofing cement or in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, and extend onto roofing membrane 4- or 6-inches respectively.

3.9 ROOF DRAINS

A. Coordinate installation of roof drains and related flashings to NRCA Drawing BUR-20.

B. Extend full roof membrane over surface of drain base.

C. Mop in and seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating membrane with two plies of felt.

D. Set clamping ring in a uniform layer of plastic cement after cap sheet is installed.

E. Prevent excessive bitumen from entering drain bodies.

3.10 ACCESSORIES

A. Place wood blocks under air conditioning condensate piping, electrical lines, and conduits. Secure piping to block and set loosely on completed roofing over extra piece of mineral cap sheet material. Position to facilitate good drainage. Do not set blocks in mastic.

B. Sweep away loose aggregate surfacing and set walkpads on roof in additional flood coat of hot roofing asphalt where indicated on Drawings in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

C. Install walk pads where indicated or noted on Drawings.

D. Coating: Apply reflective coating per manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. When roofing has cured, apply elastomeric base coat at all roof areas exhibiting

discoloration due to exposure of asphalt at seams, spills and where tracked across roof surface.

2. When base coat has dried, apply elastomeric top coat. 3. Roof appearance shall be uniform light roof color and reflectance, without streaks of

black asphalt or other discoloration.




A. A sufficient work force shall be provided to meet requirements specified herein. The foreman shall be skilled in the trade and qualified to lay out and supervise the work, and shall be in attendance at all times during roofing work installation.

B. Apply roofing over clean, dry and warm surfaces during fair weather.

C. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with inspection and testing firm appointed to audit the application of roofing, and ensure its conformance with the specifications and special requirements of the project.

D. Testing Agency: City or its agents will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

E. Sample Cutout: 1. At City's request, a 12 by 12-inch cutout sample will be taken from one for each

5,000 square feet, to determine compliance with the specifications. Each square of roofing will be reviewed by approved inspection and testing laboratory to ensure compliance with manufacturer's specifications. If materials and application do not conform to these specifications, the cost of these tests shall be borne by the roofing subcontractor; if tests do conform, costs will be borne by the City.

2. Take cutout in strict accordance with roofing materials manufacturer's specifications. Repair sampled area by feathering-in patch consisting of same number of plies as specified in this Section.

3. Approximate quantities of components within built-up roofing will be determined according to ASTM D3617.

4. Test specimens will be examined for interply voids according to ASTM D 617 and to comply with criteria established in Appendix 3 of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing."

5. Repair areas where test cuts were made according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

G. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.12 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect or City Representative 48 hours in advance of date and time of

inspection.

B. At completion of roofing installation and associated work, meet with Contractor, Architect, installer, installer of associated work, City, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of roofing system.

C. Walk roof surface areas of the building, inspect perimeter building edges as well as flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each party in attendance.



D. The roofing system manufacturer reserves the right to request a thermographic scan of the roof during final inspection to determine if any damp or wet materials have been installed. The thermographic scan shall be provided by the Roofing Contractor.

E. Protect surrounding surfaces against damage from roofing work. Where hoisting is necessary, hang tarpaulins to protect walls.

F. If core cuts verify the presence of damp or wet materials, the Roofing Contractor shall be required to replace the damaged areas at his own expense.

G. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time above inspection as required to a produce an installation which is free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

H. Notify the Architect upon completion of corrections.

I. Following the final inspection, provide written notice of acceptance of the installation from the roofing system manufacturer.

J. Immediately correct roof leakage during construction. If the Contractor does not respond within twenty-four (24) hours, the City will exercise rights to correct the Work under the terms of the Conditions of the Contract.

3.13 CLEANING

A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Division 1.

B. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. Consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions

C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes in areas where finished surfaces are soiled by bitumen or other source of soiling caused by Work of this Section. Apply additional coating if required to ensure uniform appearance.

D. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements of this Section.

E. Repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

3.14 PROTECTION

A. Ensure that trades that follow the roofing installation protect the completed installation from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and City.

C. Provide plywood on planks for storage of materials of other trades, and where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, to prevent direct contact with roofing.



3.15 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. At a time and date agreed to by the City, instruct the City's facility manager, or other representative designated by the City, on the following procedures: 1. Roof troubleshooting procedures. 2. Notification procedures for reporting leaks or other apparent roofing problems. 3. Roofing maintenance. 4. The City's obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect and force. 5. The Manufacturer's obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect and

force.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 07 56 00-1 Fluid Applied Reinforced Roof System

SECTION 07 56 00

FLUID APPLIED REINFORCED ROOF SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL




A. Provide roof systems and flashings for the following applications, with related concealed accessories as required for complete watertight installation: 1. As shown on drawings and at exposed parapets faces and caps.


A. Section 07 51 00 – Built Up Bituminous Roofing

B. Section 07 60 00 – Flashing and Sheet Metal

1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials Publication (ASTM) 2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (U.L.) 3. Western Colloid Details, Drawings and Notes

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Pre-Roofing Conference: Prior to starting the application of the roofing system, there will be a pre-roofing conference with the owner's representative and Architect to assure a clear understanding of the specifications. The conference shall be attended by the Contractor(s) and the Membrane Manufacturer's representative.

B. Warranty: The contractor shall warrant for 2 years, from the date of completion, that the roofing system is free of defective materials and workmanship. Repairs that become necessity because of defective materials and/or workmanship while this roofing is under warranty shall be performed by the contractor. Any additional warrantees shall be provided by the contractor to the owner.

C. Manufacturer shall certify that materials submitted have been used in like application and that they have been actively engaged in the manufacture of these materials for a minimum period of 15 years prior to submittals, as required. The manufacturer shall certify that the contractor is authorized and approved for the application of their materials.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is a certified installer, approved or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project: Minimum of 5 years.



1. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff and training to install materials, products and equipment per the specified requirements with a minimum of five years of experience with a record of successful in service performance on projects of similar scope and scale


A. Provide continuous protective membrane without gaps or holes where indicated on Drawings.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. 1. Include installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations. 2. Include certification of data indicating VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) content of

all components of the waterproofing system.

B. Provide Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected. 1. Polyester Fabric: 12-inches (300 mm) square for each type..

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for waterproofing.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

F. Product Certificates: Product manufacturer’s written certification of compatibility that underlayment material and accessory materials are compatible with flashing and other materials that come in contact with the barrier.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Storage: Prior to and during project, protect all materials from inclement weather conditions. Keep lids tightly closed on all containers when not in use. Locate materials temporarily stored on the roof in approved areas and distribute the load to stay within the live load limits of the roof construction.

B. Handling: Select and operate materials handling equipment so as not to damage existing construction and applied roofing. Handle roll materials in a manner to prevent damage to edges and ends.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:

A. This Fluid Applied Reinforced Roof System is water based and should be applied when weather conditions permit proper application and drying. Application will not be permitted during inclement weather (wet, rain, snow, freeze). The temperature during application shall be a minimum of 55 degrees Fahrenheit (F) and rising. Do not attempt application when rain, inclement weather or temperatures below 40 degrees F are expected within 48 hours



after application. The system should not be applied if there is ice or frost on the roof surface/deck. The preparation and repair portion of the system that does not include water based materials may be applied immediately prior to inclement weather if necessary.

1.10 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY:

A. Protective Coverings: Contractor shall take proper precautions to protect owners property against damage and overspray. The use of shield boards, maskings and protective coverings shall be used as necessary. Western Colloid Products is not responsible for damages caused by the overspray of any of its products.

SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND WEIGHTS No. Component Amount Dry Weight Lb.** 1 Base Coat #298 Emulsion 5 Gallons 19. 2 Polyester Fabric 1 Ply 2.5 4 Top Coat #298 Emulsion 5 Gallons 19. 5 Reflective Surface Coating - SilverWhite Aluminum 1.5 Gallon 4.5

Total System Dry Weight 45. Total System Dry Mils (approximate) 90 ** weight approximate (per 100 sq. ft.)

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION OF ROOF SYSTEMS:

A. The system is water based and environmentally friendly. It has very low odor. It is reinforced with tough, light weight polyester fabrics.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Fluid Applied Reinforced Roofing: 1. Basis of Design: Western Colloid 2. Tremco 3. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are acceptable in accordance

with Section 00660. 2.3 MATERIALS: Shall conform to the respective specifications and to the requirements herein.

A. Polyester Fabric: Shall be Western Colloid’s 2.75 ounce firm or 3.0 ounce soft, stitchbonded polyester fabric used as a reinforcing fabric in asphalt emulsion.

B. SBS Fiber Glass Base Sheet: Shall be minimum 25 lb., SBS asphalt coated, G-2 type base sheet conforming to ASTM D 4601-95.

C. SBS Modified Bitumen Cap Sheet: Shall be minimum 4mm., granule surfaced, SBS modified with fiberglass and or polyester reinforcement(s).

D. Asphalt Flashing Compound: Asbestos free, cut back roof mastic reinforced with non asbestos fibers. ASTM D 4586-86 Type 1.



E. Modified Asphalt Flashing Compound: Asbestos free, cut back roof mastic reinforced with non asbestos fibers. Modified to form a permanently rubberized compound.

F. Elastic Cement #800: Elastomeric Flashing & Sealing Compound: A water base, highly concentrated acrylic resinous plastic emulsion with inert mineral pigments and fillers as manufactured by Western Colloid. For application to all exposed terminations, metal joints and any areas needing a tough, highly flexible sealing compound. Available in white or black.

G. #298 Asphalt Emulsion: A premium clay stabilized asphalt emulsion ASTM D 1227 Type III as manufactured by Western Colloid. Produced in a continuous colloid mill process without any added surfactants or additives. Also known as Glas-Shield Waterproofing Compound for cold process roofing.

H. SilverWhite #525: A specially formulated aluminum asphaltic emulsion for use as a protective coating where a high degree of reflectivity and weatherproofing is desired. SilverWhite is a unique formula that is manufactured from #298 Emulsion, special resins, the highest quality ingredients and polished aluminum flake. Manufactured by Western Colloid.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. Roof membrane shall be repaired and made sound and watertight prior to application of the fluid applied reinforced roofing membrane using one or more of the following steps.

B. Remove all loose gravel, dirt, dust and foreign debris by vacuum, washing, sweeping or power blower. The entire surface shall be properly cleaned so as to receive proper attachment of the new fluid applied membrane. Areas of light dirt and dust may require only sweeping or power blowing. Areas of heavier dirt, dried mud or contamination may require washing. Use strongest cleaning method necessary to achieve best results.

C. Valleys and ponding areas shall be washed and may require priming so as to receive a positive attachment of the system. If priming is necessary to any area, use #298 Asphalt Emulsion diluted 20 to 30 percent with water as primer. Apply vigorously with brush and allow to dry. Valley and ponding areas shall receive an extra ply of polyester set in #298 Asphalt Emulsion prior to the application of the membrane.

D. All blisters are to be repaired using the “floating patch” (or other approved) method with asphalt flashing compound and modified base or cap sheet. Remove blisters with flat shovel, scraper or knife. Embed modified base or cap sheet in application of asphalt flashing compound. Apply pressure to smooth and achieve complete contact of sheet and flashing compound. Edges of sheet shall extend at least 6 inches beyond widest point of blister being repaired. Apply asphalt flashing compound to seal edge of sheet.

E. Large splits are to be repaired using the “floating patch” (or other approved) method with asphalt flashing compound and modified base or cap sheet. Make cuts in the membrane 2 to 3 inches long at the end of each split. Make cut at right angle to split to stop the split from continuing. Embed modified base or cap sheet in application of asphalt flashing compound Apply pressure to smooth and achieve complete contact of sheet and flashing compound. Edges of sheet shall extend at least 6 inches beyond widest point of split being repaired. Apply asphalt flashing compound to seal edge of sheet.



F. Repair and dress roof area as needed with special attention to penetrations, pipes, terminations and flashings.

G. Apply #800 Elastic Cement to all pipe flashings, cones, exposed metal joints and flanges using brush or trowel. Also apply #800 Elastic Cement to all corners at curbs and skylight flashings or any area that has been previously repaired with roofing mastic. Small splits and irregularities are to be repaired using a three course method with #800 Elastic Cement. To the area needing repair apply #800 at a rate of 5 gallons per 100 sq. ft.(aprox. 1/8 in. thick). Into the wet #800 embed 1 ply of polyester fabric. Brush the fabric into the #800 to insure full saturation having no wrinkles or voids. Over the fabric apply another coat of #800 at a rate of 4 gal. per 100 sq.ft.. Allow to dry.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Examination 1. Verify required condition of substrate and adjacent construction with installer present.

Make any corrections before proceeding with underlayment installation. 2. Do not proceed with installation of roof system until unsatisfactory conditions have

been corrected. Proceeding with installation indicates acceptance of substrate.

B. Base and Wall Flashings: Prior to the application of the membrane, install one ply of Polyester Fabric into a full coat of 5 gallons per 100 sq.ft.(per ply) of #298 Asphalt Emulsion achieving full saturation. Polyester ply shall extend over cant onto deck and continue up wall to terminate as necessary, under counter flashing, reglet or wall cap flashing per Western Colloid details.

C. Edge Flashings: Remove and replace gravel stops and metal edge where necessary. Where gravel stop is replaced, replace with low or no rise metal edge. Metal edge shall be nailed at 4" O.C.. Strip-in the metal with modified base sheet set in asphalt flashing compound making sure to cover all nails. Leave at least 2” of metal bare at edge to insure positive attachment and seal of polyester fabric in emulsion. Where edge flashing is left in place, cut back roofing to provide for a positive attachment of the new membrane per Western Colloid details.

D. Vent and Pipe Flashings: If flange is removed and replaced or new flange is installed, set flange of metal "jack" in a bed of asphalt flashing compound and attach with nails. Strip-in the metal with modified base or cap sheet set in asphalt flashing compound making sure to cover all nails. Continue new membrane up to base of cone. Apply #800 Elastic Cement to top of cone extending onto pipe and insure complete seal is achieved.

E. Roof Drains (clamping type): Prior to the application of the roofing membrane, remove clamping ring and clean as necessary. Embed modified cap sheet in application of modified asphalt flashing compound into the drain bowl and extending a minimum of 18" from center of drain onto the deck (or as necessary to extend beyond drain sump). Apply pressure to smooth and achieve complete contact of cap sheet and modified asphalt flashing compound. Replace clamping ring. The roofing membrane system is to be installed leaving approximately 2 to 3 inches distance from the drain ring. Apply a thin bead of # 800 Elastic Cement to the membrane termination after it has dried. Be sure to feather the #800 so as not to cause water to dam. Optional: The new membrane may be terminated at the drain bowl and clamped with the drain clamping ring. Omit the SBS membrane and add an extra ply of polyester fabric set in #298 to the drain area. The polyester shall extend at least 18 inches from the center of the drain or as necessary to extend beyond the drain sump or ponding area. The new membrane must be allowed to dry before setting the clamping ring.



F. Misc. Flashings: Where sign anchors, equipment supports or other projections penetrate the roof membrane, seal with #800 Elastic Cement creating a "cone" shaped seal. Where large voids must be bridged use 1 ply of polyester fabric in the #800. Misc. flashings to be of #800 Elastic Cement and Polyester Fabric and to be constructed in a manner acceptable to the membrane manufacturer as necessary to meet the needs of each flashing detail.

G. MEMBRANE: Over the properly prepared surface, apply a coat of #298 Asphalt Emulsion at a rate of 5 gallons per 100 sq.ft.. Immediately following and starting at the low edge of the roof, embed a full width of Polyester Felt continuing up the roof with full width sheets. Overlap each ply a minimum of 3”. End laps shall overlap a minimum of 4”. Lightly broom each ply of polyester felt to achieve full saturation having no wrinkles or voids. Polyester shall terminate 2 inches above cant. Do Not walk on the polyester during application while emulsion is still wet causing displacement of the #298 Asphalt Emulsion. Over the ply felts apply a final coat of #298 asphalt emulsion at a rate of 5 gallons per 100 sq.ft.. Allow to cure.

H. Reflective Coating - SilverWhite #525: After roof has cured, apply reflective coating. To prevent damage to the membrane, the reflective coating should be applied early in the day prior to the heating and softening of the emulsion surface. If surface becomes soft and sticks to equipment or feet, discontinue application. Wash roof surface to remove any asphaltic residue that may cause lack of adhesion or “tobacco staining”. Apply over the entire roof surface, SilverWhite #525 aluminum reflective roof coating at a rate of 1½ gallon per 100 sq. ft.. For best results, spray apply. (For roller or brush touch-up, use SilverWhite #530.)

I. CLEANUP: Each day, remove from the job site, debris, scraps, containers and any rubbish resulting from the installation of the roofing system.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 07 60 00-1 Flashing and Sheet Metal

SECTION 07 60 00

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Galvanized sheet metal including flashings, counterflashings, and copings.

B. Stainless steel flashings and counterflashings.

C. Sheet metal flashings and counter-flashings at roof.

D. Concealed sealants used in conjunction with installation of sheet metal flashing.

E. Soldered pan flashings at doors, windows and other openings as detailed.

F. Flashings at wall panel and window systems not supplied by system manufacturer.

G. Sheet metal backing as needed for attachment of cabinetry, bathroom accessories, roofing, windows, and other items requiring support throughout project.

H. Miscellaneous sheet metal flashing not provided by other trades or suppliers.


A. Section 07 27 29 – Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane: Installation of flexible flashings under sheet metal at roof locations.

B. Section 07 41 00 – Metal Panels.

C. Section 07 51 00 – Built-up Bituminous Roofing: Installation of flashings with roofing.

D. Section 07 92 00 – Join Sealants.


A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Fabricate and install flashings and copings capable of resisting forces for the appropriate wind zone, per Factory Mutual's Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.

C. Temperature Range: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F, material surface.



D. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the maximum range of ambient and surface temperatures provided above by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of sealant joints, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects when subject to 100 year seasonal temperature ranges. 1. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and

trim thermal movements. 2. Base engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar

heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

E. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to the building interior.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Describe material profiles, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, interface with other work, and installation details. 1. Clearly indicate dimensioning, layout, general construction details including closures,

flashings, locations and types of sealants, anchorages, and method of anchorage and installation for all typical and non-typical flashing details, terminations and transitions.

2. Include the following information: a. Material. b. Thickness of material. c. Weight. d. Finish.

3. Show the location of each item and details of expansion joint covers, including the direction of expansion and contraction.

C. Samples for Verification: Provide two samples of flat sheet metal for each gauge and finish specified. 1. Sheet Metal Roofing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, including

finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, [cleats,] [clips,] [battens,] and other attachments.

2. Sheet Metal Roofing Trim and Metal Closures: 12 inches (300 mm) long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.


A. Conform to profiles and sizes shown on drawings, and comply with "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA, for each general category of work required.

B. Applicator: Applicator who has complete sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance and with 5 years minimum experience. 1. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff and training to install





A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with a suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of sheathing, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than the following: 1. Sheet Metal Flashings: Minimum 30 percent post-consumer recycled content.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality, mill phosphatized where indicated for field painting. 1. Do not apply an acrylic passivator coating to galvanized sheet metal schedule to be

painted, or remove this coating mechanically before delivery to the project site. 2. Finish: Standard (dull) mill finish; painted unless noted otherwise on Drawings.

B. Lead Sheet: ASTM B101, Type 51121, minimum 4lb/sq ft except not less than 6 lb/sq ft for welding.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed. 1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled). 2. Surface: Smooth, flat.

D. Sealant: See Section 079200.

E. Bedding Compound: Rubber-asphalt type.

F. Plastic Cement: Asphaltic base cement.

G. Solder: 1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM B32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin

and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. 2. For Copper: ASTM B32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. 3. Solder for Lead: ASTM B32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead.



4. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

H. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape.

I. Burning Rod for Lead: Same composition as lead sheet.

J. Sealant: Type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight; see Section 079200.

K. Concealed Sealant: Butyl type suitable for use in conjunction with sheet metal; non-staining; non-corrosive, non-shrinking and non-sagging; ultra-violet and ozone resistant for exterior concealed applications. 1. Tremco/Curtain Wall Sealant.

L. Flux: FS O-F-506.

M. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

N. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

O. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187.

P. Self Adhering Sheet Membrane and/or Building Paper Underlayment: See Section 072729-Underlayments.

2.3 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated. 1. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with

neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers and with channel for sealant at top edge.

2. Flexible Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.

3. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.

B. Drawbands: Stainless steel.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop-fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.



B. Fabricate sheet metal with flat-lock seams; solder with type solder and flux recommended by manufacturer, except seal aluminum seams with sealant and, where required for strength, rivet seams and joints.

C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness and weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application of metal.

D. Fabricate corners, transitions, and terminations as a single unit; extend a minimum of 4-inches and a maximum of 8-inches in any direction.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from the same material as the accessory being anchored or from a compatible, non-corrosive metal. The thickness of these cleats and attachment devices should be as recommended by SMACNA's 'Architectural Sheet Metal Manual' and Factory Mutual's Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the given application, but not less than the thickness of the metal being secured.

F. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.

G. Coat backside of fabricated sheet metal with 15-mil sulfur-free bituminous coating, SSPC-Paint 12, where required to separate metals from corrosive substrates, including cementitious materials, wood or other absorbent materials; or provide other permanent separation.

H. Provide for thermal expansion of running sheet metal work by overlaps of expansion joints in fabricated work. Where required for watertight construction, provide hooked flanges filled with polyisobutylene mastic for 1-inch embedment of flanges.

I. Space expansion joints at intervals of not more than 50-feet. Conceal expansion provisions where possible.

J. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276-inch (0.7 mm) thick.

2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required for a complete drainage system. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections, fully soldered. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Material: Copper; 24 oz./sq. ft. minimum. 2. Expansion Joint-to-Downspout Spacing: 50-feet maximum.

B. Strainers: Wire ball downspout strainers in accordance with SMACNA Figure 1-24D.

C. Downspouts: Fabricate square gutters and downspout surrounds indicated on Drawings, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal supports, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Material: Copper; 16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick). 2. Finish: Painted.

D. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.



1. Cleanouts: Slate and Copper Sales Company, ED4INC downspout inline cleanout, or equal. Provide 4-inch cleanouts on copper downspouts where indicated on Drawings.

2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide joint cover plates. 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm). 2. Copper where indicated on Drawings.

2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in maximum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6-inches (150 mm) beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high end dams. 1. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where

indicated to receive counterflashing. 2. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop, unless otherwise indicated.

Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4-inch (19 mm) at exterior face of wall and down into joint 3/8-inch (10 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

3. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from galvanized steel. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4-inch (19 mm) and down into joint 3/8-inch (10 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

2.8 PREFORMED FLASHING SLEEVES

A. Vent Stack Flashing: Metal flashing sleeve, uninsulated, with integral deck flange. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products. b. Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. c. Thaler Metal USA Inc.

2. Metal: Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) 3. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Diameter: [As indicated on Drawings. 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from galvanized steel 0.0276-inch (0.7 mm) thick.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish: Mill phosphatized and field painted where exposed, unless noted otherwise.

C. Custom colors as selected by Architect.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Ensure that adjacent work by other trades has been completed as required and as shown on the Drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Allow wet substrates to dry thoroughly.

B. Clean debris from all substrates.

3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. See Section 072729.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Anchor work in place with non-corrosive fasteners, adhesives, setting compounds, tapes and other materials and devices as recommended by manufacturer of each material or system.

C. Install self-adhesive flashing prior to or in conjunction with sheet metal items, as shown on Drawings.

D. Provide for thermal expansion and building movements. Comply with recommendations of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA.

E. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

F. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

G. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.



H. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.

I. Composition Stripping: Cover flanges (edges) of work set on bituminous substrate with 5 courses of glass fiber fabric (ASTM D1668) set in and covered with asphaltic roofing cement.

J. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4-inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4-inch (19 mm) for wood screws. 1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. Exposed fasteners should have

bonded neoprene washers or should be sealed.

K. Seal moving joints in metal work with butyl joint sealants, complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 as required for watertight construction. 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less

than 1-inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).

L. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2-inches (38 mm) except where pre-tinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not use open-flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and

flow solder into joints. Fill joints completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

2. Clean metal surfaces of soldering flux and other substances that could cause corrosion.

3.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.

B. Gutters: Join sections with soldered joints or lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant at cleats and sheet metal spacers. 1. Anchor and lock back edge of gutter to continuous eave or apron flashing. 2. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet

(15.24 m) apart. Install expansion-joint caps.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide gauge material to allow spans indicated on drawings without additional supports. Provide collection conductor box and flashing flange at wall penetration as detailed. Provide fasteners designed to hold conductor box and downspout securely in place. 1. Connect downspouts to drainage system indicated. 2. Connect downspout to plumbing piping inside wall. 3. Pressure test collector box plumbing connection prior to closing up wall to ensure a

watertight installation. 4. Seal at exterior wall penetration after exterior finishes are installed.



3.6 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be watertight.

B. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4-inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4-inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant.

C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4-inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. 1. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof. Use

stainless steel drawband and tighten. 2. Seal top of membrane flashing with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes

with stainless steel drawband. 3. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with

flashing. 4. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for

lead flashing on vent piping.

3.7 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Through-Wall Flashing: At plaster walls, extend flashing through plaster system, across air space behind plaster, and up face of sheathing at least 8-inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4-inches (100 mm). 1. Install metal sealant stops with sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to

form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 for application indicated.

3.8 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.


A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.



C. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Division 01.

D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

E. Performance: Watertight and weatherproof performance of flashing and sheet metal work is required.



May 2013: Permit/Bid Set 07 84 00 - 1 Firestopping

SECTION 07 84 00

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Section Includes (but is Not Necessarily Limited to): 1. Installation of firestops and smoke seals through fire rated assemblies including: 2. Voids Around:

a. Pipes b. Conduits c. Cable trays d. Cables and wires e. Structural members

3. Construction Joints that Include: a. Intersecting points between walls, floors and ceilings of rated systems.

B. Coordinate requirements with firestopping with work involving penetrations in fire rated

assemblies. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 07 21 00: Thermal Insulation.

B. Section 09 29 00: Gypsum Wallboard Systems.

C. Division 22: Plumbing

D. Division 26: Electrical

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Provide materials tested in accordance with following standards, unless

otherwise specified. 1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

a. ASTM E84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. b. ASTM E119, Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. c. ASTM E814, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

B. Fire Stopping: Comply with California Building Code, Current Edition. 1. Provide Underwriter’s Laboratory approval numbers for required fire ratings; approval

of other laboratories contingent upon acceptance of applicable authorities.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 01. B. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer’s literature including data for materials and prefabricated devices, including descriptions sufficient to identify materials and devices on job.

C. Certificates of Compliance:



1. Provide certificates accompanied by classification indicating material or combination of materials used meets requirements specified for flame spread and fire resistance.

2. Certificates to be by nationally recognized testing authority or by other supporting evidence is satisfactory to Architect.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All materials shall be asbestos free and non-carcinogenic. Materials should meet the

requirements for use in a “Green Building” as defined by the U.S. Green Building Council and the ADTM Green Building Sub-committee E 50.06.

B. Firestop materials shall contain no flammable or toxic solvents and shall not produce

toxic or flammable out gassing during the drying or curing process.

C. Firestop materials used shall not require solvent based chemicals for clean-up purposes.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING. A. Deliver materials in their original unopened packages and store in location providing

protection from damage and exposure to elements. B. Damaged, outdated or deteriorated materials shall not be used.

C. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) will be be available on the job site for all materials.

Follow Manufacturer’s guidelines for use, handling and disposal. 1. Do not use any product whose MSDS contains warning that continued inhalation

may cause silicon’s or lung cancer. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Pre-Installation Conference: Convene a pre-installation conference to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related adjacent work.

B. Sequence: Perform work of this and other sections in proper sequence to prevent

damage to the Firestop Systems and to ensure that their installation will occur prior to enclosing or concealing work.

C. Do not cover Firestop Systems until they have been properly inspected and accepted by

the authority having jurisdiction and/or Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Dow Corning Corp./Fire Stop Systems. B. General Electric Co./Pensil Firestop Systems. C. United States Gypsum Co./USG Firestop System. D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.



2.02 MATERIALS A. General: Choose products and methods meeting applicable codes and Specification

requirements for each firestopping application, subject to Architect’s acceptance. B. Firestopping Materials: Provide materials for penetrations in time-rated floor, wall, and

partition assemblies capable of preventing passage of flame, smoke, and hot gases. 1. Penetration test: Provide materials passing ASTM E814 for penetration fire stopping

indicating maintenance of time-rated adjacent assemblies. a. Additional Tests: Where required by applicable authorities, provide materials

passing ASTM E119 time-temperature fire conditions for fire ratings indicated for assemblies.

2. Flame Spread: ASTM E84 flame spread rating of 25 or less. 3. Fire-Rated Electrical Box Sealant: Hevi-Duty/Nelson “Firestop Putty Pads,” or

approved equal. C. Firestopping: Maintain fire rating of assembly in which firestopping is installed, such as

floor, partition, or wall, in accordance with ASTM E119 tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces and conditions receiving or affecting the work. Do not proceed until

unsuitable conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install firestopping in accordance with manufacturer’s literature and installation

instructions and recommendations. B. Completely fill void space with firestopping materials regardless of geometric

configuration, subject to tolerances established by firestopping manufacturer. C. Apply firestopping materials at penetrations of pipes, conduits, and ducts prior to

application of insulation. D. Support firestopping for filling voids in floors in which smallest dimension is 4” or more for

same load as floor is designed to support or protect by permanent barrier to prevent loading on firestopped area.

3.03 FIELD INSPECTION

A. Maintain copy of manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations at each

work area. B. Keep area of work available for inspection by Architect and applicable authorities before

and after application of firestopping.

3.04 CLEAN-UP A. On completion of work, remove debris, excess materials, and equipment from Project

site. B. Repair damage caused by work of this section; clean exposed surfaces soiled by work

and leave work ready to receive following work.


May 2013: Permit/Bid Set 07 92 00 - 1 Joint Sealants

SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Exterior Joints in Vertical Surfaces and Horizontal Non-traffic Surfaces: 1. At flashing and sheet metal. 2. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. 3. Perimeter joints around frames of storefronts, doors, windows, and louvers.

B. Interior Joints in Vertical Surfaces and Horizontal Non-traffic Surfaces: 1. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. 2. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of concrete walls and partitions. 3. Interior rated and non-rated sealants. 4. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows,

and elevator entrances. 5. Control and expansion joints in walls, floors and overhead surfaces. 6. Joints at wall penetrations. 7. All other joints required to be sealed to provide a positive barrier against penetration

of air and moisture. 8. Joints between items of equipment and other construction.

C. Mechanical seals at exterior wall penetrations.

D. Joint sealant primers and accessories.


A. Section 07 27 29 – Underlayments.

B. Section 07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.

C. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Sealing of perimeter joint and through-wall penetrations.

D. Section 08 81 00 - Glazing: Sealants used in glazing.

E. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board: Sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.


May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 07 92 00-2 Joint Sealants

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data and installation instructions for each type of joint sealant required.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. 1. Submit 2 copies of manufacturer’s standard color chart with physical samples of each

color. Submit information on availability of custom colored sealants.

C. Certifications: Submit the following: 1. By joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required for

sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

2. Manufacturer’s letter of certification that products are appropriate for the uses intended.

3. Contractor’s certification of joint size, design and compatibility with adjacent materials as required under ‘Quality Assurance’.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. 1. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff and training to install


B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. All sealers used as filler must meet or exceed Bay Area Air Resources Board Reg. 8, Rule 51.

D. Where ever possible, avoid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) based products.

E. Certification: Contractor shall submit to the Architect written certification from the sealant manufacturer that joints are of the proper size and design, that the materials supplied are compatible with adjacent materials and backing, that the materials will properly perform to provide permanent watertight, airtight or vaportight seals (as applicable), and that materials supplied meet specified performance requirements.



F. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding the Work. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E548.

2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.

G. Sealant manufacturer shall confirm in writing that all materials contacting the sealants, including joint backings, gaskets, spacers, and joint substrates, are compatible with the sealant to be installed. Schedule sufficient time to test these materials for compatibility with the sealant, as necessary. Compatibility tests shall be performed to the sealant manufacturer’s standards.

H. Sealant manufacturer shall confirm in writing the appropriate joint preparation and priming techniques required to obtain rapid, acceptable adhesion of the joint sealants to the joint substrates.

I. Perform field adhesion testing of joint sealants to all surface types. Field adhesion testing shall be completed and results shall be reviewed and approved by sealant manufacturer and installer before commencing sealant installation.

J. Mockup: Build mockup incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution: 1. Joints in mockup of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to

receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials intact and legible.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted

by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. Below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 3. When joint substrates are wet or retaining moisture.

B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.

C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. 1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.


A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated.



2.4 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS

A. Exterior Silicone Weatherproofing and Control Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, also ASTM C1193 and tested under ASTM C719; Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT, M, G, A, and O; single component, low-modulus, non-sag sealant, use at exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces such as but not limited to: 1. Butt joints between composite metal panels. 2. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows,

storefronts, louvers, and similar openings. 3. Control and expansion joints in exterior soffits and overhead surfaces. 4. Other exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces for which

no other sealant is specified. 5. Acceptable Sealants:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 790. b. Pecora Corporation; 890. c. Tremco; Spectrem 1.

B. Exterior Polyurethane Weatherproofing and Control Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, A, and O; single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging type; color as selected; use in exterior vertical surfaces such as, but not limited to: 1. Window and door perimeters, reglets, and flashings. 2. Control and expansion joints in exterior soffits and overhead surfaces. 3. Acceptable Sealants:

a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I. b. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex 1a. c. BASF (Sonneborne); NP 1. d. Tremco; Dymonic FC. e. Tremco; Dymonic FC.

C. Reglets and Flashings Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, A, and O; single component elastomeric. 1. Acceptable Sealants:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 795. b. Pecora Corporation; 895. c. Tremco, Inc.; Spectrem 2.

D. Flashings Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, polyurethane-based sealant; Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, and Use T, NT, G, and M; single component elastomeric. 1. Acceptable Sealants:

a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFlex-15LM. b. Tremco, Inc.; Vulkem 921.

E. Concrete Walkway Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M and A, Grade P, Class 25, Use T, M, and O; multi-component, pourable urethane sealant. 1. Acceptable Sealants:

a. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200. b. Sika, Inc. SikaFlex 2c SL. c. Tremco Incorporated, THC 900/901.

F. Mechanical Seals: Modular, mechanical type, consisting of inter-locking synthetic rubber links shaped to fill the annular space between the pipe and wall openings at pipe penetrations. Suitable for use in water, direct ground burial and atmospheric conditions. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Thunderline/Link Seal, Model “C” (800-423-2410), or approved equal. b. INNERLYNX, Model PWS



c. Color: Black unless indicated otherwise.

2.5 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS

A. Interior Weatherproofing and Control Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, A, and O; single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging type; color as selected; use in interior surfaces such as, but not limited to: 1. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. 2. Perimeter joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior openings. 3. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows,

storefronts, louvers, elevator entrances and similar openings. 4. Other interior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces subject to

movement for which no other sealant is specified. 5. Acceptable Sealants:

a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. b. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex 1a. c. BASF (Sonneborne); NP 1.

B. Interior Latex Joint Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C834, Type S, Use O, Grade NS; use at interior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces such as, but not limited to: 1. Perimeters of interior door and window frames. 2. Interior wall surfaces scheduled to receive latex paints. 3. Perimeters of plumbing fixtures. 4. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. 5. Perimeter joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior openings. 6. Joints on precast beams and planks. 7. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows,

storefronts, louvers, elevator entrances and similar openings. 8. Trim or finish joints subject to movement. 9. Acceptable Sealants:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20. b. BASF (Sonneborn); Sonolac. c. Tremco; Tremflex 834.

C. Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; Use NT, G, A, and O; use on non-porous interior surfaces under high humidity and temperature extremes. For use in bathrooms, and similar applications where joints need protection against fungi and bacteria and where recommended for interior joints in wet areas. 1. Acceptable Sealants:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. b. Pecora, Inc. 898. c. Tremco, Inc Tremsil 200.

D. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Non-sag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90; use for drywall or plaster wall systems, bedding electrical boxes and other wall outlets. 1. Acceptable Sealants: One of the following or approved equal:

a. Pecora Corporation; AIS 919 Accoustical and Insulation Latex Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremflex 834 or Tremco Acoustical Sealant.



2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings and accessory materials, including primers, of material and type that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Foam Joint Fillers: Non-gassing, preformed, compressible, resilient, non-staining, non-waxing, non-extruding strips of flexible plastic foam of the material indicated below, as recommended by manufacturer for compatibility with their sealant; of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth, prevent three-sided adhesion, provide a surface against which to tool, and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a

surface skin) or Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance and as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from pre-construction joint sealant-substrate tests and field tests. Certify that primer will not permanently stain adjacent joint surfaces.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints, to mask off adjacent joint surfaces where sealant is not permanently intended to be applied.

D. Bondbreaker Tape: Polyethylene pressure sensitive adhesive tape, to be used in areas where backer rod cannot fit and where three-sided adhesion is to be avoided.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance.

B. Verify that joint sizes and surfaces are free of defects and acceptable for installation of joint sealants.

C. Verify joint dimensions and shapes to ensure they are within the sealant manufacturer’s guidelines. Resolve any variances prior to installation. Do not proceed with sealant installation until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Thoroughly clean the areas that the new sealant will contact using a de-greasing solvent not harmful to the environment using the two-rag wipe technique. IPA (isopropyl alcohol) is not a degreasing solvent. The new sealant should have a minimum contact area of 1/4”.

B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,

harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed ceramic tile.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 JOINT PRIMING

A. Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on pre-construction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Allow primer to dry. Do not prime areas that cannot be sealed the same day.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SEALANT BACKINGS

A. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. 3. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and

replace with dry material.



3.5 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.

D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.

E. Install joint backing to maintain the following joint ratios: 1. Joints up to 1/2 inch wide: 1:1 width to depth ratio. 2. Joints Greater than 1/2 inch wide: 2:1 width to depth ratio; maximum 1/2 inch joint

depth.

F. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C1193, unless otherwise

indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C1193.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants as appropriate for type of joint-sealant application indicated. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.

4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to

joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.



5. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants and sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

B. Leave finished work in a neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers onto adjacent surfaces.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion.

B. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 08 11 13-1 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

SECTION 08 11 13

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Standard steel doors and frames indicated and scheduled on Drawings.


A. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Support framing for steel frames.

B. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants: Sealants for installation around steel door and window frames.

C. Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware: Installation of hardware in steel frames.

D. Section 08 81 00 – Glass Glazing: Installation of glass in steel frames.

E. Section 09 91 00 – Painting: Finish painting of steel items.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets. Metal thicknesses indicated below correspond to former gage thicknesses: 1. 20 Gage: 0.032-inch (0.8-mm). 2. 18 Gage: 0.042-inch (1.0-mm). 3. 16 Gage: 0.053-inch (1.3-mm). 4. 14 Gage: 0.067-inch (1.7-mm). 5. 12 Gage: 0.093-inch (2.3-mm).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

C. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings.



D. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.


A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames", ANSI A250, and as specified herein.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

C. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations: 1. Manufacture all labeled doors in strict accordance with specifications and procedures

of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. and ANSI A250. 2. In guarantee and shop drawings, comply with nomenclature established in American

National Standards Institute publication A123.1, latest edition, "Nomenclature for Steel Doors and Steel Door Frames."

3. Reference Standards: The work is subject to applicable portions of the following standards: a. ANSI A115 "Door and Frame Preparation fort Door Locks and Flush Bolts."

American National Standards Institute. b. ANSI A123.1 "Nomenclature for Steel Doors and Steel Door Frames,"

American National Standards Institute. c. NFPA 80 "Fire Doors and Windows," National Fire Protection Association. d. ANSI/UL 63-70 "Fire Door Frames." e. NFPA 101 "Life Safety Code," National Fire Protection Association. f. Hollow metal doors and frames shall comply with the Specifications for Custom

Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) Standard CHM 174.

g. Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association.

D. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff and training to install materials, products and equipment per the specified requirements with a minimum of five years of experience with a record of successful in service performance on projects of similar scope and scale


A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory finished doors.

B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.

C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.




A. Post-Set Frames: Prepared openings shall be properly located and sized, plumb and square. Do not force-fit frames into improperly constructed openings.

B. Preset Frames: Wall/partition and frame locations shall be accurately marked before frames are erected.

1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Hardware: Obtain proper templates and instructions from hardware manufacturer. Obtain hardware that is to be factory installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following, or approved equal: 1. Curries Company. 2. Republic Builders. 3. Steelcraft, an Ingersol Rand Company. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.


A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. VOC Content: Adhesives, sealants, paints, welding, and coatings applied on-site on the interior of the building and products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits as specified in Section 018113 - Sustainable Design Requirements. 1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Fire Ratings: Provide as indicated on Drawings.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A653, with ASTM A924, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

C. Door Louvers: SDI 111C, sight proof, inverted V or Y blades, with insect screen at exterior doors, size as indicated on Drawings.

D. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.



E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M.

F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching standard steel door frames of type indicated.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088100.

2.4 STANDARD STEEL DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Non-Rated Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb,

polystyrene, polyurethane, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core that produces doors complying with ANSI A250.8.

3. Fire Door Core Construction: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. 4. Vertical Edges, for Single- and Double-Acting Doors: Square edge. 5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick

end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel

Doors and Frames."

B. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) or

Model 2 (Seamless) composite construction where indicated on Drawings.

C. Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush)

or Model 2 (Seamless) composite construction where indicated on Drawings.

2.5 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face corners and seamless face

joints. 2. Frames for Level 1 and Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 3. Frames for Level 3 and Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply with exterior frame requirements. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face corners and seamless face

joints. 2. Frames for Level 1 and Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 3. Frames for Level 3 and Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet.



4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as frames to comply with the following minimum sizes: 1. Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch (3.0 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6

inches (152 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 2. Pivots: Minimum 0.167 inch (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6

inches (152 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 3. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7

mm) thick. 4. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) thick.

E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.

F. Jamb Anchors: 1. Metal Stud Anchor: Z-type anchor, welded to frame, 0.053-inch thick steel, UL listed

as required for fire rating. 2. Compression Type for Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.

G. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows: 1. Used at all frames installed prior to walls. Where frames are installed after walls,

install an additional jamb anchor within the lowest 6-inches of the door jamb, one each side.

2. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 3. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with standard steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch (16 mm) high, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, steel wire

complying with ASTM A510 (ASTM A510M) may be used in place of steel sheet.

B. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A153/A153M, Class C or D as applicable.



C. Shop Applied Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, air-drying or baking type, suitable as a base for specified finish paints.

D. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation.

E. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames.

F. Finish: Paint in accordance with Section 099100.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.

B. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site.

C. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from only cold-rolled steel. Install insulation in doors where scheduled on Drawings.

D. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from cold-rolled or hot- rolled steel (at fabricator's option).

E. Provide 3/8-inch back bend return on frames where gypsum board wall material occurs whether on one or both sides.

F. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16-gage inverted steel channels. Seal joints watertight.

G. Fabricate frames having multiple openings with mullion members having no visible seams or joints. Continuously weld face, rabbet, and soffit joints between abutted members and finish smooth when exposed to exterior.

H. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. Paint heads to match adjacent surfaces.

I. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.

J. Prepare frames for silencers except for frames which receive weatherstripping.

K. Provide dust cover boxes or mortar guards of 0.016-inch thick steel at all hardware mortises on frames.

L. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at project site.

M. Attach fire rated label to each rated frame and door unit.



N. Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and Hardware Institute.

O. Factory-install louvers in prepared openings.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish standard steel door and frames after assembly.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A780. 1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in

steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

C. Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel; comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

D. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm). 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install standard steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified.

C. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of ANSI A250.11 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated.

D. Except for frames located at in-place concrete and at drywall installations, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.



E. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws.

F. Standard Steel Frames: Install standard steel frames for doors, sidelights, borrowed lights and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until

permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have

been properly set and secured. e. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. f. Apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with mortar, grout,

and plaster containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor

and secure with post-installed expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of post-

installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

4. Insulation at 60-minute rated openings: The framing system shall insulate against the effects of fire, smoke and heat transfer from either side. The perimeter of the framing system to rough opening shall be firmly packed with mineral wool fire stop insulation.

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a

line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a

horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of

jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

G. Standard Steel Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch

(1.6 mm). c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum

3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

H. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with standard steel door and frame manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly

not more than 9 inches (230 mm) oc, and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) oc from each corner.




A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Division 01.

C. Clean grout and other bonding material off standard steel doors and frames immediately after installation.

D. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.

E. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.


LEDDY MAYTUM STACY ARCHITECTS HPSY: Building 813 LMS Project No.: 1007

May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 08 33 23-1 Overhead Coiling Doors

SECTION 08 33 23

OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Renovate existing overhead coiling doors as required to make complete, operable assemblies, with hardware, motors and attachment devices. Where necessary provide new door and motor complete. Includes SITE SURVEY dated March 9, 2012 by THE SMITH COMPANY.

B. All overhead coiling doors that are to be repaired shall include the following work at both interior and exterior: 1. Scrape, clean, & refinish doors and components. 2. Repair or replace damaged curtains, hoods slats, springs and bottom bars. 3. Repair or replace motors and wiring.

C. Survey condition of all overhead coiling doors prior to bidding and submit written report to Architect recommending which overhead coiling doors can be restored and which require replacement. 1. Based on survey, provide complete listing of overhead coiling doors to be replaced.

Listing shall indicate description of overhead coiling doors to be replaced and degree of restoration for remaining overhead coiling doors as agreed upon with Architect and Owner.

2. Work Description: Contractor shall submit a work description detailing products to be used and sequences for repairs of windows to be restored.

D. Repair all overhead coiling doors to working condition.


A. Overhead coiling doors.

B. Electrical operating motor, hardware, and supports.

C. Summary of work titled SITE SURVEY dated March 9, 2012 by THE SMITH COMPANY.


A. Division 26 Electrical: Electrical power supply

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.



1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the following: 1. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Show locations of replaceable fusible links. 3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Curtain Slats: 12 inches (305 mm) long. 2. Bottom Bar: 6 inches (150 mm) long. 3. Guides: 6 inches (150 mm) long. 4. Brackets: 6 inches (150 mm) square. 5. Hood: 6 inches (150 mm) square.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For overhead coiling doors, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the overhead coiling doors is based on the manufacturer identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Cookson Company with motor drive; no manual drive chain 2. Cornell. 3. Overhead Door Co. 4. R & S Manufacturing, Inc. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.

2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION



A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel (SS)

sheet; complying with ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation. a. Minimum Base-Metal (Uncoated) Thickness: 22 gauge b. Slat Profile: match existing.

2. Inside Curtain Slat Face: To match material of outside metal curtain slat.

B. Endlocks and Windlocks for Coiling Doors: Malleable-iron casings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.

C. Bottom Bar for Coiling Doors: Consisting of 2 angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch (38 by 38 by 3 mm) thick; galvanized, stainless-steel, or aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats.

D. Curtain Jamb Guides for Coiling Doors: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles or channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Build up units with not less than 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) thick galvanized steel sections complying with ASTM A36/A36M and ASTM A123/A123M. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks.

2.3 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hood: Form to act as weatherseal and entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and provide fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 1. Fabricate hoods for steel doors of minimum 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, hot-dip

galvanized steel sheet with G90 (Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A653/A653M.

2. Shape: Manufacturer's standard.

B. Weatherseals: Provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets fitted to bottom and top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door head, use 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of hood. 1. Provide motor-operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and sensor

edge. 2. In addition, provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- (3-mm-)

thick seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door jambs for a weathertight installation.

C. Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks. 1. Locking Bars: Single-jamb side operable from inside only. 2. Lock cylinder is specified in Section 08710 Door Hardware.

D. If door unit is power operated, provide safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.



2.4 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. (2.5 mm/m) of span under full load.

C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.

D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.

E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.

2.5 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Provide crank operated doors to open and close utilizing a guide mounted crank box

through shafting and precision cast iron reduction gears for use prior to final utility connection.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically engaging chain and sprocket operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

D. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.

E. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or dc.

F. Door-Operator Type: Provide wall-, hood-, or bracket-mounted, jackshaft-type door operator unit consisting of electric motor, enclosed gear-head-reduction drive, and chain and sprocket secondary drive.

G. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motors complying with NEMA MG 1; with overload protection; sized to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at not less than 2/3



fps (0.2 m/s) and not more than 1 fps (0.3 m/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 1. Type: Polyphase, medium-induction type. 2. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building

electrical system. 4. Provide open dripproof-type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1

enclosure.

H. Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." 1. Provide interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-

purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. 2. Coordinate location of switch with Architect.

I. Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety sensor edge,

located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. a. Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar.

1) Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device.

J. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

K. Provide gravity release and connection to fire alarm system.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate door sections to provide units not more than 24 inches high, with rolled horizontal meeting edges forming a weather seal. Enclose ends and provide intermediate stiles and horizontal and diagonal reinforcing as required for stability.

2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Baked Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked finish consisting of primer and topcoat according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness. 1. Color and Gloss:

a. Custom painted finish on side rails, sheet metal coil cover, and all items exposed to view.



b. Coiling Door: Custom painted finish. c. See Section 09 91 01 for custom colors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine locations of electrical connections and confirm power is available for connection to electrical operators.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports.

B. Set guides, door, and operating equipment complete with required hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.

D. Securely brace door guides suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only.

E. Fit and align door assembly including hardware, level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.

F. Install perimeter trim and closures.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment. 3. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected fire-release system.

Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.


A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.

B. Remove visible markings.

C. Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning.



3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.


Mar. 9, 2012

SITE

SU

RVEY

BUIL

DIN

G 81

3Hu

nter

’s Po

int S

hipy

ard

BACKUP DATA—3.5

Mar. 9, 2012

SITE

SU

RVEY

BUIL

DIN

G 81

3Hu

nter

’s Po

int S

hipy

ard

BACKUP DATA—3.6

Mar. 9, 2012

SITE

SU

RVEY

BUIL

DIN

G 81

3Hu

nter

’s Po

int S

hipy

ard

BACKUP DATA—3.7


May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 08 40 00-1 Entrances and Storefronts

SECTION 08 40 00

ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Storefront framing system with integrated hopper windows for the following: 1. Thermally broken aluminum exterior storefront where indicated on Drawings: 2. Reinforcing, fasteners, anchors, attachment devices, flashing and accessories

necessary to complete work.

B. Aluminum/glass doors.

C. Preparation of frames for door hardware.

D. Coordination of installation of operable aluminum windows within storefront systems.

E. Aluminum composite and sheet metal panels associated with storefront system.


A. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants: Perimeter sealants around installed storefront system.

B. Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Non-rated and rated steel doors and frames.

C. Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware: Installation of lock cylinders.

D. Section 08 81 00 – Glass Glazing: Glass glazing and aluminum composite panel glazing associated with storefront system.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. DAF-45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.

B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. 501.2 Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for Water Leakage. 2. 2605 Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on

Architectural Extrusions and Panels. 3. 608.1 Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color

Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 4. 701.2 Specifications for Pile Weatherstripping. 5. Manual #10 Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. 6. SFM1 Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual.



C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A117.1 Safety Standards for the Handicapped. 2. Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials used in Buildings – Safety Performance

Specifications and Methods of Test.

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A36 Structural Steel. 2. A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 3. B209 Aluminum and Aluminum - Alloy Sheet and Plate. 4. B221 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 5. B308 Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes, Rolled or Extruded. 6. E283 Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls and Doors. 7. E330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls

and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 8. E331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and

Doors by Static Air Pressure Difference.

1.5 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide glazed storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure or detriment to appearance or performance, the effects of the following: 1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. 3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited

to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads, and expansion and contraction due to structural movement.

4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 5. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal

and structural movements, to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure.

B. Design Requirements: 1. Drawings are diagrammatic and may not identify problems of thermal or structural

movement, glazing, anchorage, or moisture disposal. Contractor shall review Drawings, glazing unit dimensions and weights, and site conditions and provide all items, including engineering confirmation, required to satisfy performance requirements indicated in this Specification and as required by manufacturer to comply with system requirements.

2. Drawings establish basic intent and approximate dimension of units, sight lines and profiles of members. Window configurations may be non-rectilinear in shape due to façade layouts and building geometry. Contractor shall field verify dimensions and details and prepare submittal drawings for Architect's review and approval prior to beginning fabrication.

3. Provide concealed water tight fastening. 4. Provide entrance and storefront systems, including necessary modifications, to meet

specified requirements and to maintain visual design concepts indicated on Drawings.

5. Attachment considerations are to take into account site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening or



fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves.

6. Anchors, fasteners and braces shall be structurally stressed not more than 50% of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied.

C. Performance Requirements: At a minimum provide the following: 1. Strength: Design system to withstand loads as required by California Building Code

but not less than following minimum loading. a. Wind: Uniform inward and outward wind pressures based on 85 mph wind

speed, Exposure ‘B’; pressures as calculated per current code requirements. b. Seismic: Conform with applicable codes. Size, fabricate, assemble and erect

work to accommodate interstory drift (horizontal displacement) during a major seismic event. Interstory drift values for this building are calculated as follows: 1) Maximum Ds (delta S) displacement values vary, but do not exceed 1¼”

over the height of the building (less than ½% drift) 2) Dm (delta M) values are as calculated per current code requirements. 3) When tested to AAMA 501.4, system must meet design displacement of

0.010 x the story height and ultimate displacement of 1.5 x the design displacement, 0.015 x the story height, and 0.025 x the story height

c. Building Deflections: Size, fabricate, assemble and erect primary members to accommodate building deflections.

2. Window System Deflections and Thermal Movements: Size primary members for temperature variations as follows; fabricate, assemble and erect work to maintain limitations. a. Design for normal-to-plane-of-wall deflection of L/180 of clear span maximum;

except L/250 of span for glass supporting members. b. Parallel-to-wall deflection of less than 75% of glass edge clearances. c. Thermal expansion and contraction movements resulting from not less than

ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F, which may cause a material temperature range of 160 degrees F.

3. Water and Air Leakage: Installed system shall be free of leakage of both water and air. a. Water leakage is defined as uncontrolled penetration of water (not including

condensation) to interior of building. b. Static and Dynamic Water Resistance: No uncontrolled leakage when tested

in accordance with ASTM E331 at test pressure of 15.0 psf as defined in AAMA 501

c. Air leakage shall not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot of surface area when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at differential static pressure of 6.24 psf.

4. Condensation Resistance: Provide minimum tested Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) value of 66 for frame as tested in conformance with AAMA 1503.

5. Thermal Performance: Provide minimum Center of Glass U-Factor value of 0.63 tested in conformance with AAMA 1503 for standard 1-inch insulating glazed window wall system, including frame, glazing and operable windows and doors.

6. Sound Transmission: When tested to ASTM E90, the Sound Transmission Class (STC) shall not be less than 33 based upon 1” insulating glass (1/4”, 1/2” AS, 1/4”); OR, not less than 37 based upon 1” insulating glass (1/4” Lam, 1/2” AS, 1/4” Lam).

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including: 1. Manufacturer's standard details, fabrication methods and descriptive literature. 2. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 3. Data on factory finishing, hardware and all accessories and components. 4. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.



B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including layout and installation details, relationship to adjacent work, elevations at 1/4-inch scale, detail sections of typical composite members, anchors and reinforcement, hardware mounting heights, glazing details, internal sealant locations, and accessories. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage

of moisture in the system to the exterior.

C. Samples for Verification: 1. For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 2. Hardware.

D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. Coordinate and/or provide door hardware items specified under Section 08700-Door Hardware.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, provide analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Include the following: 1. Fabrication details and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 2. Design calculations.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

G. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum-framed systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

H. Qualification Data: 1. Submit installer qualifications verifying years of experience.

I. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.

J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer/ Fabricator Qualifications: 1. The fabricator and installer shall have successfully completed at least five projects

similar in complexity, scope and size in the past 10 years, with a record of successful in-service performance, in accordance with the contract documents and as specified.

2. Refer to Section 002113 and Section 004912 for Subcontractor’s Experience Statements Form requirements

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.



C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing entrance and storefront systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.

D. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for entrance and storefront systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum entrance and storefront systems from one source and from a single manufacturer.

F. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review and approval.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging.

B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air.

C. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or permanent damage.


A. Field Measurements: Verify storefront openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without

delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating storefront components without field measurements. Contractor is responsible to coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.



c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide entrance and storefront system manufactured by one of the following manufacturers, or approved equal: 1. Oldcastle Building Envelope (Vistawall). 2. Kawneer Company, Inc. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.

2.2 STOREFRONT SYSTEM PRODUCTS

A. Thermally broken exterior storefront system with integrated hopper windows. 1. Profile: 2” x 4-1/2” front set internally glazed system for assemblies incorporating up

to 1-inch insulated glazing units. 2. Storefront Basis of Design: Oldcastle Building Envelope “FG 3000 Thermal

Multiplane” thermally broken glazing system. 3. Integrated Window Basis of Design: Oldcastle Building Envelope “2000 Series”

a. Bottom Hung Project In (BHPI) b. HC 60

B. Provide internal steel reinforcement at mullions as required for spans indicated, glass lite sizes and types specified, and at door locations where door leaf exceeds 36 inches, and as required to meet design criteria and support imposed loads on system.


A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from the following metals with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than that indicated below: 1. Steel: Average recycled content of steel to be a minimum 60 percent. 2. Aluminum: Average recycled content of aluminum to be a minimum of 50 percent.

B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer’s whose facilities are within a 500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested, extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.

C. VOC Content: Adhesives and sealants applied on-site on the interior of the building and products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits as specified in Division 01.



1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209/B209M. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221/B221M. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Aluminum Panels and Break Shapes: Aluminum panels shall be supplied and installed by aluminum window wall installer for all locations noted or implied on Drawings, or as required for a watertight system. 1. Sheet metal shapes: Factory finished aluminum sheet conforming to ASTM B209,

3003 alloy, 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick, minimum; finish and color to match adjoining window wall or storefront assembly.

2. Aluminum Panel Stiffeners: As required, following manufacturer’s recommendations based on panel size and design.

3. Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard attachment screws. 4. Formed Metal Trim, Flashings, Corners, Closure Strips, and Other Exposed Items:

Match face sheet in material, finish, and color, unless otherwise designed 5. Color and Finish: Match storefront system.

C. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36, or ASTM B308 for structural

aluminum: (1 ¼” x 4 9/16” x ¼”) steel channel (vertical mullions) and (1 ¼” x 4 11/16” x 12 ga) steel channel (vertical jambs).

2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

D. Aluminum Faced Composite Panels 1. Manufacturer: Alusuisse Composites, Inc.; ALUCOBOND or approved equal. 2. Composition: Two sheets of aluminum sandwiching a solid core of extruded

thermoplastic material formed in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. The core material shall be free of voids and air spaces and not contain foamed insulation material. Products laminated sheet by sheet in a batch process using glues or adhesives between materials are not acceptable.

3. Thickness: 0.236 inch (6mm) 4. Fire Performance: ASTM E84 - Flame Spread 0, Smoke Developed 0. 5. Aluminum Face Sheets: Thickness: 0.50mm (0.0197-inch), Alloy: AA5005 Anodized

material. 6. Color and Finish: Match storefront system. 7. Refer to Drawings for locations and Section 088000-Glazing for additional

information.

2.5 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.



1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides Retained by

structural sealant at vertical edges and mechanically with gaskets at horizontal edges.

3. Glazing Plane: As indicated. 4. Framing:

a. Storefront: Screw spline system. b. Curtain Wall: Shear-block system.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A123. 1. Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches thick,

reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard non-corrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts.

C. Fasteners: Provide corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components and adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Provide concealed fasteners. Where exposed fasteners are unavoidable, use

countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system. 4. Exposed fasteners must have bonded neoprene washers or be sealed. 5. Provide drilled and tapped fasteners at jamb locations where attached to

architectural steel members exposed to view at building exterior. See Drawings for locations and detail notes. Do not fasten through full depth of steel at these loctions.

D. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead-soft stainless steel, or 0.026-inch-thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components and adjacent materials. 1. Install where noted on drawings, and as required for a watertight installation. 2. Where exposed, paint to match finish of adjoining storefront system.

E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC

content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.6 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 81 00 - Glass Glazing.

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type in hardness recommended by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements.



D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows: 1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C1184, single-component neutral-curing silicone

formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems indicated. a. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a

VOC content of 100 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Glass to Mullion Sealant Color: Black. c. Butt-joint Glass Sealant Color: Clear.

2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use. a. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a

VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Color: Matching structural sealant.

F. Secondary Sealants and Joint Fillers: For use as weatherseal at perimeter of entrance and storefront systems, compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact, as listed in Section 079126. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

2.7 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Stile-and-Rail Type Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Manufacturer: Heavy traffic aluminum doors: Oldcastle Building Products (Vistawall)

“Rugged MS”, Kawneer “350 Heavy Wall”, or approved equal. 2. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-

inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods or j-bolts.

3. Design: As follows: a. Stile Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width. b. Provide wide stile only as required for door hardware installation requirements.

Coordinate with door hardware. See Section 087100. 4. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and

preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

5. Reinforcement: Provide additional structural reinforcement at oversized doors (i.e. greater than 36 inch leaf size.)

B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware and on Drawings. Coordinate all required door hardware, operators, electrical equipment interface, etc. for a complete installation.



2.8 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC

content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Protective Coatings / Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat, or alkyd type zinc chromate primer complying with FS TT-P-645.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or

deformations, before finishing. 2. Provide sub-frames and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required

for a complete system. 3. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the Drawings. Variable dimensions

are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required, to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. Field verification of dimensions is required.

4. Provide custom die cut and/or stock pressure plates as required to accommodate various glazing thicknesses indicated on Drawings, and to comply with all dead load and lateral loading requirements.

B. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. 1. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or

discoloration of finished surfaces. 2. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides from

exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. Restore mechanical finish.

C. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.

D. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and

moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible. 8. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of

contacting members.

E. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.



F. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.

G. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system. Stick framing is not permitted.

H. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance

requirements, sag resistance and rigidity. 2. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding

of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes.

3. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 4. Provide for wiring within framing system to accommodate power-operated hardware.

Include cutouts, raceways, conduits, and other such provisions to permit a complete operating hardware system.

I. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in

adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. For exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping against fixed stops. 3. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. 4. Pre-glaze door units to greatest extent possible.

J. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. 1. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at

Project Site.

K. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

L. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.

M. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site.

N. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication.

O. Pre-glaze door units to greatest extent possible.

P. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish.

Q. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface.

R. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing and/or increased system wall thickness as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.



S. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a non-absorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead.

T. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members.

U. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.

V. Weather Stripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge.

W. Provide framing members to rigidly glaze spandrel panels and column covers within framing system.

X. Provide special shapes and filler pieces indicated with tight corners.

2.10 FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.

B. Entrances, Storefronts and Windows: High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: Custom color to be selected by Architect.

2.11 STEEL REINFORCEMENT PRIMING

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying primer.

B. Surface Preparation: Perform manufacturer's standard cleaning operations to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel.

C. Priming: Apply manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and

electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels. 1. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades

indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.

C. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact mortar, concrete, or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

3. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum.

D. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior.

E. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 81 00 – Glass Glazing. 1. Structural-Sealant Glazing:

a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

b. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather

stripping. 2. Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades

without warp or rack. 3. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door

hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. a. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware

manufacturers' written instructions. 4. Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions

using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants to produce weathertight installation.



I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet

(3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length. 2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm).

J. Refer to Section 08 81 00 – Glass Glazing for installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed into framing and doors that are not pre-glazed by manufacturer. 1. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant

manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

2. Install structural silicone sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Mechanically fasten glazing in place until structural sealant is cured. 4. Remove excess sealant from component surfaces before sealant has cured.

K. Install secondary-sealant weatherseal according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to provide weatherproof joints. Install joint fillers behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

L. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Water Penetration Test: After completion of the installation and nominal curing of sealants, test entrances and storefronts for water leaks in accordance with ASTM E1105 at a minimum uniform static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure difference specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 4.18 lbf/sq. ft. (200 Pa), and shall not evidence water penetration.

B. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75 feet (23 m) by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

C. Conduct tests in presence of Architect and City Representative. Correct deficiencies observed as a result of this test.

D. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.



3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weathertight closure. 1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a

3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.

3.5 CLEANING


B. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds, and dirt from surfaces.

C. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in Section 088100 for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 08 51 13-1 Aluminum Windows

SECTION 08 51 13

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Thermally broken fixed frame aluminum windows.


A. Section 08 40 00 –Entrances and Storefronts.

B. Section 08 81 00 – Glass Glazing.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide windows engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's standard window assemblies representing types, grades, classes, and sizes required for Project according to test methods indicated.

B. General Design and Performance Requirements: Comply with minimum general, design and performance requirements indicated in Section 084000-Entrances and Storefronts.

C. Drawings establish basic intent and approximate dimension of units, sight lines and profiles of members. Window configurations may be non-rectilinear in shape due to existing façade layouts and building geometry. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions and details and prepare submittal drawings for Architect's review and approval prior to beginning fabrication.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of window and door required, including construction details and fabrication methods; profiles and dimensions of individual components; data on hardware, accessories, and finishes. Include recommendations for maintaining and cleaning exterior surfaces.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of each type of window and door required. Include layout and installation details, elevations at 1/4 inch = 1 foot scale, typical window unit elevations at 3/4 inch = 1 foot scale, and full-size section details of typical composite members.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish, covering, or facing indicated on an extruded shape of aluminum sheet.



D. Test Reports: From a qualified independent AAMA accredited testing agency indicating that each type, grade, and size of window unit complies with performance requirements indicated. Test results based on use of down-sized test units will not be accepted. 1. Test reports shall be accompanied by the window manufacturer’s letter of certification

stating that the tested window meets or exceeds the referenced criteria for the appropriate AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-05 window types

E. Product Substitutions: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, dimensional requirements, and aesthetic effects of aluminum windows and are based on the specific window types and models indicated. Other manufacturers whose products have equal performance characteristics may be considered provided deviations in size, profile, and dimensions are minor and do not alter the aesthetic effect.


A. Installers Qualifications: Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff and training to install materials, products and equipment per the specified requirements with a minimum of five years of experience with a record of successful in service performance on projects of similar scope and scale


A. Store and handle windows and other components in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Protect units against damage from the elements, construction activities and other hazards before, during, and after installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. The responsible contractor shall assume full responsibility and warrant for one year the satisfactory performance of the total window installation which includes that of the windows, hardware, glass (including insulated units), glazing, anchorage and setting system, sealing, flashing, etc. as it relates to air, water and structural adequacy as called for in the specifications and approved shop drawings. Any deficiencies due to such elements not meeting the specifications shall be corrected by the responsible contractor at his expense during the warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the aluminum windows is based on the manufacturer identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Basis-of-Design: Custom Window Company, Series 8300.

a. 2727 S. Santa Fe Dr. Englewood CO 80110; (800) 255-1820 2. Wausua: 7800 International Drive; Wausau, WI 54401; (715) 845-2161 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.




A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from the following metals with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than that indicated below: 1. Aluminum: Average recycled content of aluminum to be a minimum of 60 percent.

B. VOC Content: Adhesives and sealants applied on-site on the interior of the building and products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits as specified in Section 018113 - Sustainable Design Requirements. 1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish. 1. Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T5 alloy and temper.

2.4 FASTENER MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted to be noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.

B. Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.

C. Except for application of hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate.

D. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel complying with ASTM B633 and of sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

2.5 GLAZING

A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Section 088100 for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units.

B. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.

2.6 WINDOW HARDWARE

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum windows, and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel.



B. Projected Ventilators: 1. Standard: Pivotshoe roto operator with concealed 4-bar hinges. Precision Butt

hinges in combination with Hold-Open arms.

C. Locks and Latches: Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only.

D. Four- or Six-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904. 1. Locking mechanism and handles for manual operation.

2.7 WINDOW ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturer's standard accessories that comply with indicated standards.

B. Provide weatherstripping locked into extruded grooves in sash.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. 1. Frame components shall be mitered or butt jointed, as appropriate to the type of

construction required. All joints shall be welded. 2. Sash:

a. All sash extrusions shall be tubular. b. Each corner shall be mitered, reinforced with an extruded aluminum corner

key, hydraulically crimped, and "cold welded" with epoxy adhesive. c. Each sash shall have two rows of Monsanto Santoprene weatherstripping

installed in specially designed dovetail grooves in all four sides of the sash extrusion.

d. True divided lite muntins shall be coped for hair-line joinery. In no case will applied grids be accepted.

B. Units to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of units. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling framing.

C. True divided light muntins shall be a maximum of 1 1/16” wide, with profiles to match architectural drawings. In no case will applied grids be accepted.

D. Thermal Barrier 1. Thermal barrier material shall be poured-in-place two part polyurethane. 2. Specified hardware shall not bridge the thermal barrier.

E. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator. 1. All weatherstrip shall be Monsanto Santoprene or equal.

F. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.



2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.

B. Aluminum Windows: High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: Custom color to be selected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish and remove existing windows, anchors and concrete profiles only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated.

B. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 5. Remove decayed or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly

dispose of off-site. 6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 7. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.



9. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.

C. Examine existing wall openings and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation. 1. Concrete Walls: Dry, clean, sound, free of voids and spalling, and level without

offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 WINDOW INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.

C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.

D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.

E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

3.4 TESTING OF COMPLETED UNITS

A. After completion of glazing and nominal curing of sealant and glazing compounds, test exterior for water leaks per ASTM E1105 with positive test pressure of 2.86 psf for water penetration. See Section 014000 for testing agency requirements.

B. Conduct tests on not less than 5% of total window joint and glazing system.

C. Test in presence of Architect who will determine actual percentage of joints to be tested and period of water flow exposure, based upon indication, or lack of indication, of leakage.

D. Repair or replace units which leak as well as other defective or damaged work observed, and retest as directed.

E. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping, and for smooth, easy operation, requiring maximum 5 lbs. effort to operate windows.



F. Upon completion of testing and repair, lubricate hardware and moving parts.

3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, operators, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.

B. Clean aluminum promptly after installing windows. Avoid damage to finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances.

C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 08 71 00-1 Door Hardware

SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.

B. This Section includes the following, but is not necessarily limited to:

1. Door Hardware. 2. Storefront and Entrance door hardware. 3. Thresholds, gasketing and weather-stripping. 4. Door silencers or mutes.

C. Related Sections: The following sections are noted as containing requirements that relate to

this Section, but may not be limited to this listing. 1. Division 8: Section – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 2. Division 8: Section – Entrances and Storefront

1.03 REFERENCES

A. 2010 California Building Code, CCR, Title 24.

B. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association.

C. CCR - California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California State Accessibility Standards.

D. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.

E. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.

1. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives 2. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies

F. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.

1. UL 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware

G. WHI - Warnock Hersey Incorporated



H. SDI - Steel Door Institute 1.04 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS

A. General: Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Specification sections 00660.

B. Submit product data (catalog cuts) including manufacturers' technical product information for

each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

C. Submit six (6) copies of schedule organized vertically into “Hardware Sets” with index of

doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include following information: 1. Include a Cover Sheet with;

a. Job Name, location, telephone number. b. Architects name, location and telephone number. c. Contractors name, location, telephone number and job number. d. Suppliers name, location, telephone number and job number. e. Hardware consultant's name, location and telephone number.

2. Job Index information included;

a. Numerical door number index including; door number, hardware heading number and page number.

b. Complete keying information (referred to DHI hand-book "Keying Systems and Nomenclature"). Provision should be made in the schedule to provide keying information when available; if it is not available at the time the preliminary schedule is submitted.

c. Manufacturers' names and abbreviations for all materials. d. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes used in the schedule. e. Mounting locations for hardware. f. Clarification statements or questions. g. Catalog cuts and manufacturer’s technical data and instructions.

3. Vertical schedule format sample: Heading Number 1 (Hardware group or set number – HW -1) (a) 1 Single Door #1 - Exterior from Corridor 101 (b)90 (c) RH (d) 3' 0"x7' 0" x 1-3/4" x (e) 20 Minute (f) WD x HM (g) 1 (h) (i) ea (j) Hinges - (k) 5BB1HW 4.5 x 4.5 NRP (l) ½ TMS (m) 626 (n) IVE 2 6AA 1 ea Lockset - ND50PD x RHO x RH x 10-025 x JTMS 626 SCH

(a) - Single or pair with opening number and location. (b) - Degree of opening (c) - Hand of door(s) (d) - Door and frame dimensions and door thickness. (e) - Label requirements if any. (f) - Door by frame material. (g) - (Optional) Hardware item line #. (h) - Keyset Symbol. (i) - Quantity. (j) - Product description. (k) - Product Number. (l) - Fastenings and other pertinent information. (m) - Hardware finish codes per ANSI A156.18. (n) - Manufacture abbreviation.



D. Make substitution requests in accordance with Section 00660. Substitution requests must be made prior to bid date. Include product data and indicate benefit to the project. Furnish samples of any proposed substitution.

E. Wiring Diagrams: Provide product data and wiring and riser diagrams for all electrical

products listed in the Hardware Schedule portion of this section.

F. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.

G. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the

installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with close-out documents, including keying schedule

and transcript, wiring/riser diagrams, manufacturers’ installation and adjustment and maintenance information.

I. Fire Door Assembly Testing: Submit a written record of each fire door assembly to the

Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for future building inspections.


A. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, exit devices, etc.) from a single manufacturer. 1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01620 Product Options.

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing

facilities in the project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1. Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. 2. Meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.

To maintain the integrity of patented key systems provide a letter of authorization from the specified manufacturer indicating that supplier has authorization to purchase the key system directly from the manufacturer.

3. Stock parts for products supplied and are capable of repairing and replacing hardware items found defective within warranty periods.

C. Hardware Installer: Company specializing in the installation of commercial door hardware

with five years documented experience.

D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, door closers, approved-bearing hinges and seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not.



1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, (with supplementary marking on doors' UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".

E. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special

knowledge or effort.


A. Coordinate delivery of packaged hardware items to the appropriate locations (shop or field) for installation.

B. Hardware items shall be individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers,

complete with proper fasteners. Clearly mark packages on outside to indicate contents and locations in hardware schedule and in work.

C. Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals,

etc.

D. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranties of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale from day of final acceptance as follows: 1. Locksets: Seven (7) years. 2. Electronic Locks: One (1) year. 3. Closers: Ten (10) years, except electronic closers shall be two (2) years. 4. Exit devices: Three (3) years. 5. All other hardware: Two (2) years.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

1.09 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to beginning work of this section.

B. Attendance: Architect, Construction Manager, Contractor, Security Contractor, Hardware

Supplier, Installer, Key District Personnel, and Project Inspector.

C. Agenda: Review hardware schedule, products, installation procedures and coordination required with related work. Review District's keying standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS



Item Manufacturer Acceptable Substitutes

A. Hinges Ives Hager, McKinney

B. Locks, Latches & Cylinders Schlage Sargent, Falcon

C. Exit Devices Von Duprin Sargent, Falcon

D. Closers LCN Sargent, Falcon

E. Push, Pulls

& Protection Plates Ives Trimco, DCI

F. Flush Bolts Ives Trimco, DCI

G. Dust Proof Strikes Ives Trimco, DCI

H. Coordinators Ives Trimco, DCI

I. Stops Ives Trimco, DCI J. Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson Rixson, ABH K. Thresholds National Guard Pemko, Zero

L. Seals & Bottoms National Guard Pemko, Zero

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Hinges: Exterior out-swinging door butts shall be non-ferrous material and shall have stainless steel hinge pins. All doors to have non-rising pins. 1. Hinges shall be sized in accordance with the following:

a. Height: 1) Doors up to 41" wide: 4-1/2" inches. 2) Doors 42" to 48" wide: 5 inches.

b. Width: Sufficient to clear frame and trim when door swings 180 degrees. c. Number of Hinges: Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7'-5" in height. Add one for each

additional 2 feet in height. 2. Furnish non-removable pins (NRP) at all exterior out-swing doors and interior key lock

doors with reverse bevels.

B. Extra Heavy duty Commercial Mortise Locks: Schlage “L” Series as scheduled with “17” Style Lever and “A” Style Rose. 1. Locksets to comply with ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 and Security

Grade 1 with all standard trims. Locksets shall also comply with UL10C Positive Pressure requirements

2. Lock case shall be manufactured with heavy 12 gauge steel with fully wrapped design. Lock cases with exposed edges are not acceptable. Lock case shall be multi-functional allowing transformation to a different function without opening lock case.



3. Latchbolt shall have ¾” throw and be non-handed, field reversible without opening the lock case. Solid latchbolts and / or plastic anti-friction devices are not acceptable.

4. The deadbolt, when used, shall be 1” throw stainless steel with a ¾” internal engagement when fully extended.

5. All trim shall be through-bolted with the spring cages supporting the trim attached to the lock cases to prevent torquing.

6. Levers to have independent rotation in both directions. Exterior lever assembly to be one-piece design attached by threaded bushing. Interior lever assembly shall be attached by screwless shank

7. Thru-bolt lever assemblies through the door for positive interlock. Locks using a through the door spindle for attachment are not acceptable. Spindles shall be independent, designed to “break-away” at a maximum of 75psi torque.

8. Hand of lock chassis to be changeable by simply moving one screw from one side to the case to the other and pulling and reversing the latchbolt.

9. Cylinders to be secured by a cast stainless steel, dual retainer. Locks utilizing screws and / or stamped retainers are not acceptable.

C. Exit devices: Von Duprin as scheduled.

1. Provide certificate by independent testing laboratory that device has completed over

1,000,000 cycles and can still meet ANSI/BHMA A156.3 - 2001 standards. 2. All internal parts shall be of cold-rolled steel with zinc dichromate coating. 3. Mechanism case shall have an average thickness of .140". 4. Compression spring engineering. 5. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions. 6. All devices shall have quiet return fluid dampeners. 7. All latchbolts shall be deadlocking with ¾” throw and have a self-lubricating coating to

reduce friction and wear. 8. Device shall bear UL label for fire and or panic as may be required. 9. All surface strikes shall be roller type and utilize a plate underneath to prevent

movement. 10. Lever Trim: “Breakaway” design, forged brass or bronze escutcheon with a minimum of

.130” thickness, match lockset lever design. 11. Removable Mullions: Removable with single turn of building key. Securely reinstalled

without need for key. 12. Furnish glass bead kits for vision lites where required. 13. All Exit Devices to be sex-bolted to the doors. 14. Panic Hardware shall comply with CBC Section 1008.1.9 and shall be mounted between

30" and 44" above the finished floor surface. The unlatching force shall not exceed 15 lbs. applied in the direction of travel.

D. Closers: LCN as scheduled. Place closers inside building, stairs, room, etc.

1. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction with double heat

treated pinion shaft to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided.

2. All door closers shall be fully hydraulic and have full rack and pinion action with a shaft diameter of a minimum of 11/16 inch and piston diameter of 1 inch to ensure longevity and durability under all closer applications.

3. All parallel arm closers shall incorporate one piece solid forged steel arms with bronze bushings. 1-9/16” steel stud shoulder bolts, shall be incorporated in regular arms, hold-open arms, arms with hold open and stop built in. All other closers to have forged steel



main arms for strength, durability, and aesthetics for versatility of trim accommodation, high strength and long life.

4. All parallel arm closers so detailed shall provide advanced backcheck for doors subject to severe abuse or extreme wind conditions. This advanced backcheck shall be located to begin cushioning the opening swing of the door at approximately 45 degrees. The intensity of the backcheck shall be fully adjustable by tamper resistant non-critical screw valve.

5. Closers shall be installed to permit doors to swing 180 degrees. 6. All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 120 degrees F. to

-30 degrees F. without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door.

7. Provide the manufactures drop plates, brackets and spacers as required at narrow head rails and special frame conditions. NO wood plates or spacers will be allowed.

8. Maximum effort to operate closers shall not exceed 5 lbs., such pull or push effort being applied at right angles to hinged doors. Compensating devices or automatic door operators may be utilized to meet the above standards. When fire doors are required, the maximum effort to operate the closer may be increased but shall not exceed 15 lbs. when specifically approved by fire marshal. All closers shall be adjusted to operate with the minimum amount of opening force and still close and latch the door. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that hold the door in a closed position. Door shall take at least 3 seconds to move from an open position of 70 degrees to a point of 3 inches from the latch jamb. Reference CBC Sections 1133B.2.1, 1133B.2.5 & 1133B2.5.1.

9. Provide sex-bolted or through bolt mounting for all door closers.

E. Door Stops: 1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide wall type with appropriate fasteners.

Where wall type cannot be used, provide floor type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type.

2. Do not install floor stops more than four (4) inches from the face of the wall or partition (CBC Section 1133B.8.6).

3. Overhead stops shall be made of stainless steel and non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.

F. Protection Plates: Fabricate either kick, armor, or mop plates with four beveled edges.

Provide kick plates 10" high and 2" LDW. Sizes of armor and mop plates shall be listed in the Hardware Schedule. Furnish with machine or wood screws of bronze or stainless to match other hardware.

G. Thresholds: As Scheduled and per details.

1. Thresholds shall not exceed 1/2" in height, with a beveled surface of 1:2 maximum slope. 2. Set thresholds in a full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying

with requirements in Division 7 “Thermal and Moisture Protection”. 3. Use ¼” fasteners, red-head flat-head sleeve anchors (SS/FHSL). 4. Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 1133B.2.4.1.

H. Seals: Provide silicone gasket at all rated and exterior doors.

1. Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C Classified, Category “J” listed seals complying

with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252 Standards. Coordinate with selected door manufacturers' and selected frame manufacturers' requirements.

2. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected door manufacturer. Category “G” furnish fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full compliance with



NFPA 252. Where required, intumescent seals vary in requirement by door type and door manufacture -- careful coordination required.

3. Smoke & Draft Control Doors, Provide Category “H” listed seals complying with NFPA 105 for use on “S” labeled Positive Pressure door assemblies.

I. Door Shoes & Door Top Caps: Provide door shoes at all exterior wood doors and top caps at

all exterior out-swing doors.

J. Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-resistive-rated door assemblies.

2.03 KEYING

A. Furnish a masterkey system as directed by the owner or architect.

B. A detailed keying schedule is to be prepared by the owner and/or architect in consultation with a representative of Ingersoll Rand Security Consultants or an Authorized Key Center or Authorized Security Center. Each keyed cylinder on every keyed lock is to be listed separately showing the door #, key group (in BHMA terminology), cylinder type, finish and location on the door.

C. Furnish all cylinders in the Schlage Full Size Interchangable Core (FSIC). Pack change keys

independently (PKI) D. Furnish Patent Protected Schlage keys and cylinders on all locks. E. Furnish all keys with visual key control.

1. Stamp key “Do Not Duplicate”. 2. Delete key “bitting” from the key bow.

H. Furnish mechanical keys as follows:

1. Furnish 2 cut change keys for each different change key code. 2. Furnish 1 uncut key blank for each change key code. 3. Furnish 6 cut masterkeys for each different masterkey set. 4. Furnish 3 uncut key blanks for each masterkey set. 5. Furnish 2 cut control keys cut to the top masterkey for permanent I/C cylinders. 6. Furnish 1 cut control key cut to each SKD combination.

I. Furnish Keying Transcript (50-123) to owner. End-user to provide letter of authorization to hardware dealer to allow Schlage to mail transcript (bitting list) to the end-user or designated representative.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Generally to be satin chrome US26D (626 on bronze and 652 on steel) unless otherwise noted.

B. Furnish push plates, pull plates and kick or armor plates in satin stainless steel US32D (630)

unless other wise noted. C. Door closers shall be powder-coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.



D. Aluminum items to be finished anodized aluminum except thresholds which can be furnished as standard mill finish.

2.05 FASTENERS

A. Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat head, countersunk type, provide machine screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood.

B. Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full-thread type.

C. Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by means of sex bolts and spray

painted to match closer finish.

D. Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry.

E. All exposed fasteners shall have a phillips head.

F. Finish of exposed screws to match surface finish of hardware or other adjacent work.

G. All Exit Devices and Lock Protectors shall be fastened to the door by the means of sex bolts or through bolts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify that doors and frames are square and plumb and ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

C. Fire-Rated Door Assembly Inspection: Upon completion of the installation, all fire door

assemblies shall be inspected to confirm proper operation of the closing device and latching device and that only the manufacturer’s furnished fasteners are used for installation and that it meets all criteria of a fire door assembly per NFPA 80 (Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives) 2007 Edition. A written record shall be maintained and transmitted to the Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The inspection of the swinging fire doors shall be performed by a certified FDAI (Fire Door Assembly Inspector) with knowledge and understanding of the operating components of the type of door being subjected to the inspection. The record shall list each fire door assembly throughout the project and include each door number, an itemized list of hardware set components at each door opening, and each door location in the facility.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of DHI.

B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.

C. Mounting heights for hardware shall be as recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute. Operating hardware will to be located between 30" and 44" AFF.

D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment

substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.



E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space

fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

F. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber sealant.

G. If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary changes in hardware at no additional cost.

H. Hardware Installer shall coordinate with security contractor to route cable to connect

electrified locks, panic hardware and fire exit hardware to power transfers or electric hinges at the time these items are installed so as to avoid disassembly and reinstallation of hardware.

I. Hardware Installer shall also be present with the security contractor when the power is turned

on for the testing of the electronic hardware applications. Installer shall make adjustments to solenoids, latches, vertical rods and closers to insure proper and secure operation.

J. All wiring for electro-mechanical hardware mounted on the door shall be connected through

the power transfer and terminated in the interface junction box specified for in the Electrical Section.

K. Conductors shall be minimum 18 gage stranded, multicolored. A minimum 12 in. loop of

conductors shall be coiled in the interface junction box. Each conductor shall be permanently marked with its function.

L. If a power supply is specified in the hardware sets, all conductors shall be terminated in the

power supply. Make all connections required for proper operation between the power supply and the electro-mechanical hardware. Provide the proper size conductors as specified in the manufacturer’s technical documentation.

3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.

B. Clean adjacent surface soiled by hardware installation.

C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to

acceptance or occupancy, return to that work area and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware finishes,

during the final adjustment of hardware.

E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the completion of the project, the Contractor accompanied by the Architectural Hardware Consultant, shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper functions of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.



3.04 HARDWARE LOCATIONS

A. Conform to CCR, Title 24, Part 2; and ADAAG; and the drawings for access-compliant positioning requirements for the disabled.


A. Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to inspect installation and certify that hardware and it's installation have been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein.

3.06 SCHEDULE

A. The items listed in the following schedule shall conform to the requirements of the foregoing specifications.

B. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is used with each door.

Manufacturers Abbreviations (Mfr.) ADA = Adams Rite Mfg. Aluminum Door Hardware IVE = Ives Hinges, Door Stops & Silencers LCN = LCN Door Closers NGP = National Guard Products Thresholds, Gasketing & Weather-stripping SCH = Schlage Lock Company Locks, Latches & Cylinders VON = Von Duprin Exit Devices CRL = CR Laurence Stainless Steel Door Pulls SPECWORKS # 123561-B8C52TUFM HW SET: 01

6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA MULLION KR4954 689 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98EO 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98NL X 990NL 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 626 SCH 1 EA MULLION SEAL 5100 BLK NGP 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA SRI 689 LCN 2 EA SECURITY FLOOR

STOP FS18S BLK IVE

1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP 1 EA DRIP CAP 17 + 4" PDW AL NGP 2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 319V AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL

HW SET: 02

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE



1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98NL X 990NL 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA SRI 689 LCN 1 EA SECURITY FLOOR

STOP FS18S BLK IVE

1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP 1 EA DRIP CAP 17 + 4" PDW AL NGP 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 319V AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL 1 BALANCE OF HARDWARE EXISTING

HW SET: 03

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 98NL-F X 990NL 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA SRI 689 LCN 1 EA SECURITY FLOOR

STOP FS18S BLK IVE


HW SET: 04

8 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 SET HEAD/THRESHOLD

BOLT 4015 X 4085 603 ADA

1 EA DEADLOCK MS1850S 628 ADA 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-062 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 4036 628 ADA 1 EA EXIT INDICATOR 4089 628 ADA 1 EA CYLINDER GUARD MS4043 603 ADA 4 EA DOOR PULL 36LPBS 630 CRL 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA SRI 689 LCN 2 EA SECURITY FLOOR

STOP FS18S BLK IVE

1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL 1 BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR

MANUFACTURER

HW SET: 05

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 17A 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN 1 EA DOME STOP FS436 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP



HW SET: 06

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 17A 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN 1 EA DOME STOP FS436 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 2525B BRN NGP

HW SET: 07

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080R 17A 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA SRI 689 LCN 1 EA SECURITY FLOOR

STOP FS18S BLK IVE




May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 08 81 00-1 Glass Glazing

SECTION 08 81 00

GLASS GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Glass for doors, entrances, storefront and windows.


A. Section 08 01 51 – Metal Window Restoration for survey of glazing units.

B. Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

C. Section 08 51 13 – Aluminum Windows

D. Section 08 40 00 – Entrances and Storefronts

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.

C. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for

overall unit and for each lite.



1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products: 1. Coated float glass. 2. Insulating glass.

C. Samples for Verification: 1. Glass: 12-inch-square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear

monolithic glass products, 2. Sealant: 12-inch-long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of

sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's

permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Maintenance Data: For glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1.

F. Qualification Data: For installers.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000 “Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass

Units”. 3. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16

CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 4. IGMA: “Guidelines for Sloped Glazing.

B. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc.

D. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass



with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Lites more than 9 square feet (sf) in area are required to be Category II materials. 2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in

Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sf in area, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, and for lites 9 sf or less in area, provide glazing products that comply with Category I and II materials.

E. Installer Qualifications: Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff and training to install materials, products and equipment per the specified requirements with a minimum of five years of experience with a record of successful in service performance on projects of similar scope and scale.


A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install liquid sealants only when ambient and substrate temperatures are above 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to the glass fabricator in which the coated glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated glass units that deteriorates during normal use within the specified warranty period. Deterioration of the coated glass is defined as peeling and/or cracking, or discoloration that is not attributed to glass breakage, seal failure, improper installation, or cleaning and maintenance that is contrary to the manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which the insulating glass unit manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate during normal use within the specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass units is defined as an obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or a film on the interior surfaces of the glass caused by a failure of the hermetic seal that is not attributed to glass breakage, improper installation, or cleaning and maintenance that is contrary to the manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOAT GLASS

A. Uncoated Clear Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select), class and kind as indicated in schedule at the end of Part 3.



B. Uncoated Ultra-Clear Glass: Low iron content glazing: ASTM C1036, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select), class and kind as indicated in schedule at the end of Part 3.

C. Pyrolitic-Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic-oxide coating applied by pyrolitic deposition process during initial manufacture, and complying with other requirements specified.

2.2 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS

A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select), class and kind as indicated in schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass

where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

3. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated or required by Codes.

B. Safety Glass: ASTM C1048, fully tempered with horizontal tempering, Condition A uncoated, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1; thickness as indicated.

2.3 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING

A. High-performance Low-E coating providing low reflective glass outdoor appearance: 1. Provide high performance coatings from manufacturers and coating systems

indicated below, or approved equal, at all exterior glazing locations. a. PPG Industries, Inc. (Basis of Design: See Schedule at end of Section) b. Guardian Industries c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.

2. Apply coating to clear or tinted glass where indicated in Schedule at end of Section. 3. See Schedule at end of Section for basis of design glass configurations and

performance values.

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E2190, complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. PPG Industries, Inc. (Basis of Design: See Schedule at end of Section) b. Guardian Industries. c. ACI Glass. d. Ford Glass Division. e. Libby Owens Ford Company. f. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.

2. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 3. Spacer: Thermally broken aluminum with black, color anodic finish or black

powdered metal paint finish. 4. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.



2.5 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS

A. Compatibility: Select glazing compounds and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.

B. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at time of installation.

C. Silicone Sealant for Fire-rated Glazing Materials: One-part neutral curing silicone, medium modulus sealant, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25 with additional movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and compression (total 100 percent); Use (Exposure) NT; Uses (Substrates) G, A, and O as applicable. Available Products: 1. Dow Corning 795 - Dow Corning Corp. 2. Silglaze-II 2800 - General Electric Co. 3. Spectrem 2 - Tremco Inc.

D. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C920, Class A, and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates capable of water immersion without loss of properties; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25; color as selected. 1. Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic).

2. Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. b. GE Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000. c. Pecora Corporation; 865.

2.6 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent, non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release paper backing, and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Glazing Tape for Fire-rated Glazing Materials: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC) foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two sides, maximum water absorption by volume of 2 percent. Glass panels that exceed 1,393 sq. inches for 90-minute ratings must be glazed with fire-rated glazing tape supplied by manufacturer.



2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Glazing Stops: Screw applied or snap on type (beads) coordinated with glass section indicated, finished to complement exterior window finish.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

2.8 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS

A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to preglaze units at the factory, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,

offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge



damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

C. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

D. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

E. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of glazing in window units.

F. Do not allow sealants to come in contact with edges of laminated glass units.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.5 INSTALLATION – FIRE-RATED GLAZING

A. Comply with FGMA standards and instructions of manufacturers of glass, glazing sealants, and glazing compounds.

B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Inspect glass during installation and discard pieces with edge damage that could affect glass performance.

C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

D. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, flush with sight lines to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. 1. Install glazing tape in a straight line so that visibility is minimized in the finished

installation.

E. Place setting blocks located at quarter points of glass with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.

F. Glaze vertically into labeled fire-rated metal frames or partition walls with same fire rating as glass and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.

G. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.



H. Install removable stop and secure without displacement of tape.

I. Use specified glazing compound, without adulteration; bed glazing material in glazing compound; entirely fill all recess and spaces. Provide visible glazing compound with smooth and straight edges.

J. Install in vision panels in fire-rated doors in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80.

K. Install so that appropriate UL and manufacturer’s markings remain permanently visible.

3.6 EXISTING WINDOWS

A. Existing Windows at Building Exterior: Replace where cracked, missing or damaged. 1. Float glass, 1/4” thickness, to match existing. See glazing type GL-2 and elevation

Drawings. 2. See Specification 080151 - Metal Window Restoration Drawings for damaged glass

survey for replacement.

3.7 PROTECTION AND CLEANING


B. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

C. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

D. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.

E. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

F. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass using non-abrasive soft cloths as recommended by glass manufacturer.

3.8 CLEANING FIRE-RATED GLASS

A. Protect glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. 1. Do not clean with astringent cleaners. Use a clean “grit free” cloth and a small

amount of mild soap and water or mild detergent. 2. Do not use any of the following:

a. Steam jets b. Abrasives c. Strong acidic or alkaline detergents, or surface-reactive agents d. Detergents not recommended in writing by the manufacturer



e. Do not use any detergent above 77 degrees F f. Organic solvents including but not limited to those containing ester, ketones,

alcohols, aromatic compounds, glycol ether, or halogenated hydrocarbons. g. Metal or hard parts of cleaning equipment must not touch the glass surface

B. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.

3.9 GLAZING SCHEDULE

A. GL-1: Insulating Transparent Glass: 1. Basis of Design: PPG Solarban 70-XL 2. Overall Thickness: 1-inch. 3. Outside Lite: 1/4 inch thick transparent, clear, flat float glass; heat strengthened, fully

tempered: 4. Clear Low-E coating: Located on number 2 surface. 5. Interspace:

a. Content: Air b. Dimension: 1/2 inch.

6. Indoor Lite: 1/4 inch thick, transparent, clear, flat float glass; heat strengthened, fully tempered.

7. Visible Light Transmittance: 64% 8. UV Light Transmittance: 6% 9. Reflectance Visible Outside: 12% 10. Shading Coefficient: 0.32 11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 12. Winter Nighttime U Value: 0.28 13. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.26 14. Light to Solar Gain (LSG): 2.37

B. GL-2 Clear Monolithic Glass, replacement glass for Metal Window Restoration: 1. Select glazing quality, clear float glass, 2. Fully tempered, meeting FS DD-G-1403; impact safety glass 3. Minimum thickness 1/4"



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 09 29 00-1 Gypsum Board

SECTION 09 29 00

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Gypsum wallboard, rated and non-rated.

B. Exterior sheathing.

C. Sound-rated gypsum board construction.

D. Suspended gypsum ceiling systems.

E. Gypsum board trims and accessories.


A. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping: Through penetration firestopping for rated wall construction.

B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Acoustical sealant.

C. Section 09 22 16 – Non-Structural Metal Framing.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s recommendations for installation of adhesives and gypsum board.

B. Samples for Verification: Construct minimum 24” square sample panels with each type of finished surface using materials and methods specified. Accepted finishes shall establish minimum standard of quality and workmanship.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of gypsum board certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.




A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Installer Qualifications: Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff and training to install materials, products and equipment per the specified requirements with a minimum of five years of experience with a record of successful in service performance on projects of similar scope and scale.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.

C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.


A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources.

C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Gypsum Wallboard and Related Products: 1. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 2. United States Gypsum Co. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.



B. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: 1. Georgia-Pacific 2. CertainTeed 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.


A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum board products with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 50 percent.

2.3 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS

A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.

B. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, in 5/8 inch thickness to comply with ASTM C840 for application system and support spacing indicated.

C. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C1396, 5/8-inch thick throughout except where noted otherwise: 1. Fire-Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; Type X where required for fire-resistive-

rated assemblies. 2. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C1395/C1396; High-strength, sag-resistant type for

ceiling surfaces. 3. Inner Surface of Elevator Shafts: ASTM C442; Type X, 1-inch thick, DensGlass Ultra

Shaftliner, Georgia Pacific type GPFS-C gypsum wallboard or other equivalent product listed in UL assembly description, or approved equal.

4. Outer Surface of Elevator Shafts: 5/8’ USG “Firecode C” gypsum panels, Georgia Pacific type GPFS-C gypsum wallboard or other equivalent product listed in UL assembly description.

5. Sound-Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; Type X. 6. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1177, 5/8-inch- (15.8-mm-) thick water-resistant treated gypsum core board with inorganic glass mats both sides and long edges, gold color alkali resistant surface coating, for exterior applications. Basis of Design: Georgia-Pacific, Dens-Glass Gold Exterior Sheathing, or equal.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C1047. 1. Material: Formed metal or metal combined with paper, with metal sheet steel zinc-

coated by hot-dip or electrolytic processes, or with aluminum or rolled zinc.

B. Square Corner Bead Reinforcement: One of the following or equal: 1. Dur-A-Bead metal corner bead as manufactured by USG. 2. Wallboard corner bead with 1 1/4-inch flanges by manufactured Gold Bond National

Gypsum Company.

C. Metal Casing Bead: One of the following or equal: 1. No. 200A or 200B Metal Trim manufactured by USG. 2. No. 100 wall board casing manufactured by Gold Bond National Gypsum Company.



D. Control Joints: One of the following or equal: 1. No. 093; as manufactured by USG. 2. E-Z expansion joint 0.093 zinc control joint, manufactured by Gold Bond National

Gypsum Company.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated.

B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: ASTM C475; paper reinforcing tape, one grade for bedding tapes and filling depressions, and one for topping and sanding, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: 1. Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening powder products formulated for

uses indicated. 2. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for

taping and filling only, use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it.

D. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose.

E. For topping compound, use sandable formulation.

F. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. 2. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames.

B. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum panels to steel framing.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. a. Gold Bond, Type-S, 1-inch drywall screws. b. U.S. Gypsum Type-S, panhead, 1-inch.

D. Other Fasteners: As required and recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer and in accordance with the specified Standards. Space fasteners in accordance with CBC Table 47 G and 47 H.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C840 and GA-216.

B. When cutting gypsum drywall is required, work from the face side. When cutting by scoring, cut through the face paper and then snap the panel back away from the cut face. Then break the back paper by snapping the gypsum board in the reverse direction or by cutting the back paper. 1. Smooth all cut ends and edges of panels where necessary to obtain a smooth joint.

C. Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting end joints or avoid them entirely. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. At high walls, install panels horizontally with end abutting joints over studs and staggered.

D. Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, install according to ASTM C840 in specific locations as directed by Architect.

E. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

F. Locate both edge or end joints over supports. Position adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field-cut edges abut field-cut edges and ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints at corners of framed openings where possible.

G. Attach gypsum panels to studs so that the leading edge or end of each panel is attached to nailing members except where joints are at right angles to framing members.

H. For cut-outs in panels for pipes, fixtures, or other small openings, make holes and cut-outs by sawing or by such other method that will not fracture the core or tear the covering and with such accuracy that plates, escutcheons, trim, etc., will cover all edges. 1. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. 2. Use of “score and knock out” method will not be permitted.

I. Where partitions intersect open roof trusses and other structural members projecting below underside of roof structure, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4-to-1/2-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

J. Apply wall board first to ceilings and then to walls, using maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints.



K. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4-inch-to-1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.

M. Screw wallboard at edges, 7 inches oc for ceilings and 8 inches oc for walls. Field nailing shall be “double-nailing”. Space screws 12 inches oc, drive another nail 2 to 2-1/2 inches from the first. Start screws at center of gypsum board sheet. Space screws no less than 3/8 inches from edges and ends. Install screws straight with heads set slightly below the surface taking care to avoid breaking the paper face.

N. Where gypsum wallboard is applied to metal ceiling framing or furring, attach with 1 inch Type S screws at 16 inches oc in field and with 1-1/4 inch Type S screw at 12 inches oc at edges.

O. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant.

P. Place control joints to be consistent with lines of building spaces. 1. Provide where system abuts structural elements. 2. Provide at dissimilar materials. 3. Provide where lengths in partitions exceed 30'-0".

Q. At recesses for equipment and accessories in fire rated walls, line recess with fire rated gypsum board to maintain specified fire rating of wall.

3.3 ACOUSTICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

C. Double Layer Application: 1. Joints: Stagger 24-inches between layers. 2. Sound-Rated Construction: Tape face layer.

D. Sound-Rated Edge Condition: Stagger (i.e. shiplap) gypsum board layers at vertical intersections. Provide a 1/4-inch nominal gap around the gypsum board face layer at floor and ceiling intersections. Fill the 1/4-inch gap with acoustical sealant to form an airtight seal.

E. Attaching Gypsum Board: 1. Apply gypsum board of maximum practical length with the long edge parallel with and

centered on channels. Orienting the long edge vertically is acceptable on walls where a single sheet of gypsum board extends from floor to ceiling.



2. Fasten gypsum board using USG type S Bugle Head dry wall screws (or equal) of appropriate length to prevent penetration into wood framing. Said another way, do not screw into framing.

3. Hold back edges of resiliently hung gypsum board edges ¼” at all intersecting surfaces.

F. Caulking Gypsum Board/Resilient Channel Construction: 1. For all constructions, caulk the perimeter void full and airtight with an acoustical

sealant. All walls shall be acoustically sealed at floor and ceiling intersections. 2. Recessed light fixtures, junction boxes, fire sprinkler pipes, and other penetrations

must be sealed airtight with acoustical sealant.

G. Baseboard and Trim Attachment: 1. Do not rigidly attach baseboard or other finishing trim to framing through resiliently

suspended gypsum board. 2. Screw attach baseboard to channels. Gluing baseboard to gypsum board could also

be considered.

H. Penetrations: 1. Make cut-outs regular without fracturing core or tearing covering of gypsum board. 2. Minimize penetrations of insulated wall and ceiling constructions. Penetrate only

where necessary and fully seal airtight at the perimeter using acoustical sealant. 3. Where ducts and piping greater than 3-inch diameter penetrate insulated wall or

ceiling construction, provide a clearance of 1-inch + 1/4-inch at the perimeter of the penetration.

4. Where conduit piping 3-inch diameter and less (including mechanical, hydraulic, plumbing, etc.) pass through insulated wall or ceiling construction, provide a clearance of 1/4-inch + 1/8-inch between the conduit or piping and the structure, unless otherwise indicated.

5. After ductwork, conduit or piping has been installed, repair the gypsum board perimeter clearance to the specified tolerance as required. Where the clearance exceeds 3/4-inch, provide a sheet metal sleeve within the partition packed with safing insulation batts and caulk both sides airtight with an acoustical sealant. Where the perimeter clearance exceeds 3/8-inch, use a flexible backing rod to caulk against.

6. Where penetration clearance are 3/8-inch or less, caulk airtight with acoustical sealant at gypsum board.

7. All gypsum board penetrations (including those resulting from wiring, cables, and electrical junction boxes) are to be sealed airtight with acoustical sealant.

8. The back and sides of junction boxes in sound-rated construction must be sealed airtight with sheet caulking. Caulk perimeter face at gypsum board with acoustical sealant.

9. Recessed panel boards, equipment, boxes, etc. with penetration area greater than 25 sq. in. at sound-rated partitions are to be fully enclosed and sealed with 5/8-inch thick gypsum board or 2 psf sheet lead.

10. Seal multiple conduit penetrations airtight with expanding fire foam sealant. 11. Seal other sound-rated conditions with spray-applied (40 pcf) cementitious sealant

equal to Monokote Z-146.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.

B. Install corner beads at external corners.



C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound except where other types are indicated.

D. Install L-bead where edge trims can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated.

B. Carefully inspect the Drawings and verify the desired location of metal trim. Install all metal trim in strict accordance with the approved submittal of the manufacturer’s recommendations, paying particular attention to make all trim installations plumb, level and true to line with firm attachment to supporting members.

C. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound.

D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to trim accessories with concealed face flanges as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer and as required to prevent cracks from developing in joint compound at flange edges. 1. Taping is not required under wainscot surfaces, except at moisture-resistant type and

fire-rated type walls.

E. Fold reinforcing tape along its centerline and apply to all interior angles, following the same procedure for all joints.

F. Lightly sand and dry compound with fine sandpaper between coats to remove all irregularities.

G. Apply a second coat of compound to all joints, feathering approximately 3 inches beyond edges of the tape. Also apply a second coat to all nail recesses, leaving flush with the adjacent surface. When compound is dry, sand again.

H. Apply final skim coat, feathering out approximately 2 inches beyond the second coat. Third coat nail recesses and metal trims. Skim coat interior angles. After drying, lightly sandpaper surfaces, using caution not to excessively damage the face paper of the gypsum drywall.

I. Examine surfaces to ensure against defects. Touch up as required for uniformity. Provide smooth, un-textured sanded finish suitable to receive specified paint system.

J. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C840: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, service

corridors, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound

to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges on gypsum board scheduled to receive light textured coatings and light-grade wall coverings. a. Finish Texture: Smooth.



3.6 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING

A. Comply with GA-253 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9-mm) setback where non-load-bearing construction

abuts structural elements. 2. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) setback where they abut masonry or similar

materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall assembly.

D. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match spacing of structural support elements.

F. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of stud flanges, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) oc. and set back a minimum of

3/8 inch (9 mm) from edges and ends of boards.

G. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over flanges of steel studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) oc and set back a minimum of 3/8

inch (9 mm) from edges and ends of boards.

3.7 EXTERIOR SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT

A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant on joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient

quantity of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings.

2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing board joints, and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed sealant in entire face of tape. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.


A. Take all means necessary to prevent spilling and splashing compound. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Do not allow the accumulation of scrap and debris resulting from the gypsum drywall installation and finishing operations.



C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer that ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 09 91 00-1 Painting

SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Painting of building exterior, including concrete walls and rooftop structures, window jambs, heads, sills and sashes, back face of parapets, metal elements such as canopies and stairs, etc. Do not paint fences, roll-up doors, gates, glass, stainless steel items or light fixtures.

B. Surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed exterior items and surfaces.

C. Painting exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available.

D. Painting includes field-painting exposed pipes and ducts scheduled to remain on the building exterior.

E. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

F. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.


A. Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Shop-priming steel doors and frames.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply to this section. 1. Low Gloss refers to a 'velvet-like' finish with a gloss maximum of 10 when measured

with a 60-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to a low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when

measured with a 60-degree meter. 3. Satin refers to a low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when

measured with a 60-degree meter. 4. Semi-gloss refers to a satin-like finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when

measured with a 60-degree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to a high-sheen finish with a gloss range higher than 65 when

measured with a 60-degree meter.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each

material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer’s catalog number and coating material proposed for use.

2. Manufacturer’s Information: Provide manufacturer’s technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing and applying each coating material proposed for use.

3. Product MSDS Data Sheets. 4. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations

controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide four (4) 12 inch by 12 inch samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.

C. Closeout Submittal: Provide paint cards fully labeled with manufacturer of each paint system applied on the project. Provide the following with each system: 1. Manufacturer name. 2. Manufacturer’s paint product. 3. Primer name and number. 4. Color name and number. 5. Gloss level. 6. Locations where used.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

B. Installer Qualifications: Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff and training to install materials, products and equipment per the specified requirements with a minimum of five years of experience with a record of successful in service performance on projects of similar scope and scale.

C. Mock-ups: 1. Provide field samples of each color and finish, 36 sq ft minimum each in location of

final installation. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to City.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

C. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.

D. Store unused paint upon project completion in a location that is deemed safe and secure inside building for reuse later. Close and seal all partially used containers of paint to maintain quality as required for reuse.


A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

D. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Paints & Stains

a. Edison Coatings. b. Kelly-Moore. c. Benjamin Moore. d. Glidden. e. Sherwin-Williams.

2. Epoxy Primers and Polyurethane Enamels: a. TNEMEC Company, Inc. b. DuPoint Company.

3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

C. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

D. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to the manufacturer's standard color designations.

E. Color Patterns: Colors to be chosen by Architect. Assume following number of colors at each location: 1. Exterior Colors: Up to three colors, including dark tones. 2. Interior Colors:

a. Walls: One color.

2.3 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated primers that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated.

B. Concrete Primers: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer.

C. Ferrous Metal Primers: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer. Use quick drying type at interior applications.

D. Galvanized Metal Primers: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer.

2.4 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS

A. Undercoat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated undercoat materials that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated.

2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL

A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats; sheen and color as indicated.

B. Exterior Elastomeric Paint: Acrylic Elastomeric Coating, non-textured; sheen and color as scheduled. 1. Exterior Dry Film Thickness = 8 - 12 mils 2. Water Vapor Transmission = 30 perms

C. Acrylic Enamel on Prime-coated, Ferrous Metal: Alkyd-based enamel primer and acrylic finish coat; sheen and color as scheduled.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

C. Notify the Project Representative about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.

D. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 4. Plaster: 12 percent.

E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION, GENERAL

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Clean building exterior using pressurized hot water (power wash). a. Clean heavily soiled areas with fiber brush and water. b. Equip pressure washer with fan tip nozzle of 250 degree minimum. c. Do not permit water temperature to exceed 180 degrees F. d. Do not permit water pressure to exceed 1,000 psi.

D. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Project Representative in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others.

E. Follow proper procedures, methods, guidelines, and regulations for paint preparation related to lead paint sanding and other Hazardous Materials abatement requirements. Wear goggles, NIOSH-approved respirators, rubber gloves, and appropriate clothing as required.

F. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.

G. Exposed Equipment: Verify installations are complete before initiating preparation of surfaces of exposed mechanical and electrical piping, conduit, ductwork, and equipment for field-painting.

H. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

I. Factory-Primed and Enamel Substrates: Wipe clean and dry.

J. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved.

K. Protect all surrounding surfaces not scheduled for painting, including floors and ground surfaces, from paint and overspray.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

B. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete surfaces to be painted. Comply with Hazardous Materials abatement procedures specified elsewhere. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. 1. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer and in

conformance with Hazardous Materials abatement procedures. 2. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate

tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Existing Concrete: 1. Clean existing painted surfaces and remove peeling paint, oil, grease, dust, stains,

scale, efflorescence, mildew, mold, algae, blisters, and non-adhering paint. Scrape loose paint and clean entire painted concrete surface with maximum 1000 psi pressure wash.

2. Feather edges of severely deteriorated paint where several coats are removed as part of cleaning, to provide smooth transition for new paint.

3. Measure adhesion of existing paints using ASTM D3359 tape test; remove existing coatings not achieving minimum ratings of 9 to 10.

4. Where biological growth exists, clean after power washing but prior to coating application with ProSoCo BioWash.

5. Do not coat until patches and fills have cured per manufacturer’s recommendations: a. Crack Detailing: Cracks less than 1/16’’ wide can be bridged by spackling with

ELASTO-MASTIC 352. Cracks up to 1/8’’ wide should be grooved out to a width of 1/4’’ and should be filled with ELASTO-FILL 354 or suitable polyurethane sealant. Cracks wider than 1/8’’ should be cut out in accordance with proper expansion joint detailing and geometry, and should be sealed with polyurethane sealants. Sealants should be cured a minimum of 24 hours before coating.

6. Apply elastomeric primer/bonding coat to clean and sound concrete surface: Edison Coatings #342 or equal.

7. Clean primed surface with low pressure wash prior to applying finish coat. Pressure wash per manufacturer’s recommendation. (Alternatively, encapsulate building to protect from salty marine air prior to applying final coat.)

8. Apply elastomeric topcoat: Edison Coatings Elastowall 351.

D. Steel Substrates: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) and written instructions of paint manufacturer. 1. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat

before priming. 2. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damages. Wire-

brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. 1. Treat exterior galvanized surfaces according to SSPC SP-7 and interior galvanized

surfaces to SSPS SP-1.

F. Apply primers to metal surfaces in the field under any of the following circumstances: 1. Where it can be established that shop primer was applied more than 30 days (7 days

for some primers, verify with metal shop) before delivery to the site. 2. If shop-applied primer is contaminated during transport or storage. 3. If salts are deposited from marine fog, road salts, construction dusts, etc. during

storage.

3.4 MATERIALS PREPARATION

A. Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions.

B. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

C. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.

D. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

E. For typical exterior concrete color, top coat paint to be dye mixed for an entire façade in one dye lot to ensure color consistency.

3.5 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

C. Paint colors and finishes are indicated in the schedules located at the end of this Section.

D. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.

E. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as

recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions.

F. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

G. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

H. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

I. Do not paint fire-treated plywood backboards to be used for telephone or electrical equipment unless permitted by authorities having jurisdiction.

J. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces.

K. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted.

3.6 SCHEDULING PAINTING

A. Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

B. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

3.7 APPLICATION PROCEDURES

A. Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions.

B. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.

C. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

D. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer or as specified herein (whichever is thicker).

F. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

G. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not

been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint

materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials

being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with provisions of Division 1 Section ‘Construction Waste Management’.

B. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site.

C. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Project Representative.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.

C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.11 PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULES

A. Schedule: Only major areas are scheduled. Treat miscellaneous and similar items and areas within room or space with similar system.

B. Number of Coats: Where number of coats is specified, it is only as a minimum requirement. Apply additional coats, at no additional cost to Owner, if necessary to completely hide base material, produce uniform color, and provide satisfactory finish result.

C. Systems Specifications: These specifications are a guide and are meant to establish procedure and quality. Confer with Project Representative to determine exact finish and color desired.

D. Colors: Do not apply final coats of paint until colors have been accepted by Project Representative. 1. Assume single color at building exterior. 2. Final color to be selected through the submittal process during construction. For

pricing purposes, assume tone such as medium gray Benjamin Moore HC-168.

3.12 EXTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE

A. References used in this schedule are based on systems described in the Painting and Decorating Contractors of America, Master Painters Institute, Architectural Painting Specification Manual (MPI).

B. Exterior Concrete: Elastomeric Paint and 100% Acrylic Exterior 1. 1st coat – Acrylic Masonry Primer, color tinted to ensure coverage of 2nd coat. 2. 2nd and 3rd coat - Acrylic Elastomeric Waterproof Coating. 3. 4th coat - compatible 100% Acrylic Exterior Low Sheen Plasticized

C. Exterior Galvanized Steel: 1. 1st Coat - Tnemec Company, Inc., Hi-Build Epoxoline II Series V69F self-primer.

Apply 2-3 mm dry film thickness primer coat per manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. 2nd Coat – Tnemec Company, Inc., Tnemec UVX Series 750. Apply 2.5 - 4 mm dry

film thickness final coat per manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Exterior Primed Steel: 1. 1st Coat – Exterior Alkyd Primer; touch-up or prime coat as required for full coverage. 2. 2nd Coat - Acrylic semi-gloss enamel; semi-gloss sheen.

E. Exterior Galvanized Sheet Metal: 1. 1st Coat - Zinc rich primer. 2. 2nd Coat - Acrylic semi-gloss enamel; semi-gloss sheen.

F. Exterior Steel Windows: 1. 1st Coat – Exterior Alkyd Primer; prime coat as required for full coverage. 2. 2nd Coat - Acrylic semi-gloss enamel; semi-gloss sheen.

3.13 INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE

A. References used in this schedule are based on systems described in the Painting and Decorating Contractors of America, Master Painters Institute, Architectural Painting Specification Manual (MPI).

B. Gypsum Board Walls: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex, low sheen


L Studio HPSY: Building 813 LMS Project No.: 1007

May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 099101-1 Painting Graphic

SECTION 099101

PAINTING GRAPHIC

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Building graphic of building exterior, including concrete walls and rooftop structures, window jambs, heads, sills and sashes, back face of parapets, metal elements such as canopies and stairs, etc. Do not paint fences, glass, stainless steel items or light fixtures.


A. Section 099100 – Painting.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

B. Installer Qualifications: Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff and training to install materials, products and equipment per the specified requirements with a minimum of five years of experience with a record of successful in service performance on projects of similar scope and scale.

C. Brush-outs: 1. Provide field samples of each color and finish, 36 sq ft minimum each in location of

final installation (west elevation, near southwest corner). 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on brush-outs.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional brush-outs of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to City.

3. Approval of brush-outs does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in brush-outs unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

1.6 BUILDING GRAPHIC

A. Refer to Graphic Specifications drawings for color and graphic placement.

B. Paint building surfaces in light, dark and accent (blue) colors as specified in Graphic Specifications drawings.

L Studio HPSY: Building 813 LMS Project No.: 1007

May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 099101-2 Painting Graphic

C. Vector artwork files of “bldg 813” graphic for the west elevation (large) and south and east elevations (small) are available to Contractor from L Studio.

D. Reproduce “bldg 813” graphic accurately at full scale on building surfaces. (See Graphic Specifications Sheets 07–11).


DES

IGN

CO

NSI

STS

OF

THE

APP

LIC

ATIO

N O

F A

PALE

TTE

OF

THR

EE C

OLO

RS

TO T

HE

EXTE

RIO

R W

ALLS

AN

D D

OO

RS

OF

THE

NO

RTH

, EAS

T, S

OU

TH A

ND

WES

T EL

EVAT

ION

S.

Pai

nt c

olor

spe

cific

atio

ns a

re in

tend

ed to

rep

rese

nt d

esig

n in

tent

onl

y, n

ot a

pai

nt b

rand

pre

fere

nce.

Pai

nt c

ontr

acto

r w

ill p

rovi

de a

bru

sh-o

ut b

y ap

plyi

ng s

elec

ted

bran

d, c

olor

and

fini

shon

the

wes

t ele

vatio

n. L

Stud

io w

ill b

e av

aila

ble

to r

evie

w b

rush

-out

upo

n re

ques

t.

LIG

HT

CO

LOR

PAI

NT

TO M

ATC

H:

Sher

win

Will

iam

sSW

609

1R

elia

ble

Whi

teM

ATTE

FIN

ISH

DAR

K C

OLO

RP

AIN

T TO

MAT

CH

:Sh

erw

in W

illia

ms

SW 6

005

Folk

ston

eM

ATTE

FIN

ISH

ACC

ENT

CO

LOR

PAI

NT

TO M

ATC

H:

Sher

win

Will

iam

sSW

695

4R

eson

ant B

lue

MAT

TE F

INIS

H

EA

ST

EL

EV

AT

ION

NO

RT

H E

LE

VA

TIO

N

SO

UT

H E

LE

VA

TIO

NW

ES

T E

LE

VA

TIO

N

PR

EPA

RED

BY

2302

Bri

dgew

ay B

oule

vard

Saus

alito

, Cal

iforn

ia 9

4965

415.

339.

2232

GR

AP

HIC

SP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S —

SH

EET

01

BR

US

H-O

UT

• O

N E

XIS

TIN

G P

RE

PP

ED

SU

RF

AC

E P

AIN

T C

OL

OR

S I

N 6

’x6

’ S

QU

AR

ES

ON

TH

E W

ES

T E

LE

VA

TIO

N A

S S

HO

WN

.•

PA

INT

SO

TH

AT

EA

CH

CO

LO

R P

AIR

ME

ET

S:

A

CC

EN

T C

OL

OR

WIT

H D

AR

K C

OL

OR

. D

AR

K C

OL

OR

WIT

H L

IGH

T C

OL

OR

. L

IGH

T C

OL

OR

WIT

H A

CC

EN

T C

OL

OR

.

WE

ST

EL

EV

AT

ION

BR

US

H-O

UT

FO

UR

6’x

6’

SW

AT

CH

ES

ON

WE

ST

EL

EV

AT

ION

AC

CE

NT

6’

6’

6’

6’

6’

DA

RK

LIG

HT

AC

CE

NT

PR

EPA

RED

BY

2302

Bri

dgew

ay B

oule

vard

Saus

alito

, Cal

iforn

ia 9

4965

415.

339.

2232

GR

AP

HIC

SP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S —

SH

EET

02

• P

AIN

T B

UIL

DIN

G S

UR

FA

CE

1/4

LIG

HT

CO

LO

R,

1/4

AC

CE

NT

CO

LO

R,

1/2

DA

RK

CO

LO

R•

PA

INT

VE

RT

ICA

L S

IDE

S O

F R

AM

PS

IN

LIG

HT

CO

LO

R•

PA

INT

MA

IN E

NT

RY

ST

AIR

ST

EP

S A

ND

LA

ND

ING

S (

CU

RR

EN

TL

Y R

ED

) IN

LIG

HT

CO

LO

R•

PA

INT

ST

AIR

WA

Y R

AIL

ING

S I

N D

AR

K C

OL

OR

• P

AIN

T E

NT

RY

DO

OR

S I

N A

CC

EN

T C

OL

OR

• P

AIN

T S

MA

LL

“b

ldg

81

3”

GR

AP

HIC

IN

DA

RK

CO

LO

R T

O W

RA

P O

VE

R A

RC

HIT

EC

TU

RA

L L

IP

PA

INT

PE

NT

HO

US

E E

XT

ER

IOR

S I

N L

IGH

T C

OL

OR

ON

AL

L S

IDE

S

EA

ST

EL

EV

AT

ION

PR

EPA

RED

BY

2302

Bri

dgew

ay B

oule

vard

Saus

alito

, Cal

iforn

ia 9

4965

415.

339.

2232

GR

AP

HIC

SP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S —

SH

EET

03

• P

AIN

T E

NT

IRE

BU

ILD

ING

SU

RF

AC

E I

N L

IGH

T C

OL

OR

• P

AIN

T R

OL

L-U

P D

OO

RS

IN

AC

CE

NT

CO

LO

R•

PA

INT

SH

ED

SID

ES

AN

D D

OO

RS

IN

DA

RK

CO

LO

R•

PA

INT

SM

AL

L “

bld

g 8

13

” G

RA

PH

IC I

N D

AR

K C

OL

OR

TO

WR

AP

OV

ER

AR

CH

ITE

CT

UR

AL

LIP

SO

UT

H E

LE

VA

TIO

N

PR

EPA

RED

BY

2302

Bri

dgew

ay B

oule

vard

Saus

alito

, Cal

iforn

ia 9

4965

415.

339.

2232

GR

AP

HIC

SP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S —

SH

EET

04

• P

AIN

T B

UIL

DIN

G S

UR

FA

CE

1/2

DA

RK

CO

LO

R,

1/4

AC

CE

NT

CO

LO

R,

1/4

LIG

HT

CO

LO

R•

PA

INT

VE

RT

ICA

L S

IDE

S O

F R

AM

PS

AN

D S

OU

TH

LO

AD

ING

DO

CK

LIG

HT

CO

LO

R•

PA

INT

SH

ED

SID

ES

AN

D D

OO

RS

IN

DA

RK

CO

LO

R•

PA

INT

LA

RG

E “

bld

g 8

13

” G

RA

PH

IC I

N L

IGH

T C

OL

OR

• P

AIN

T R

OL

L-U

P D

OO

RS

AC

CE

NT

CO

LO

R A

ND

DA

RK

CO

LO

R O

N O

PP

OS

ING

BA

CK

GR

OU

ND

CO

LO

R•

PA

INT

ST

AIR

WA

Y R

AIL

ING

S I

N D

AR

K C

OL

OR

WE

ST

EL

EV

AT

ION

PA

INT

SH

ED

SID

ES

AN

D D

OO

RS

IN

DA

RK

CO

LO

R

PR

EPA

RED

BY

2302

Bri

dgew

ay B

oule

vard

Saus

alito

, Cal

iforn

ia 9

4965

415.

339.

2232

GR

AP

HIC

SP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S —

SH

EET

05

• P

AIN

T E

NT

IRE

BU

ILD

ING

SU

RF

AC

E I

N D

AR

K C

OL

OR

, IN

CL

UD

ING

RA

MP

S A

ND

VE

RT

ICA

L W

AL

LS

OF

LO

AD

ING

DO

CK

S•

PA

INT

SH

ED

SID

ES

AN

D D

OO

RS

IN

DA

RK

CO

LO

R•

PA

INT

AL

L D

OO

RS

IN

DA

RK

CO

LO

R

NO

RT

H E

LE

VA

TIO

N

PA

INT

SH

ED

SID

ES

AN

D D

OO

RS

IN D

AR

K C

OL

OR

PR

EPA

RED

BY

2302

Bri

dgew

ay B

oule

vard

Saus

alito

, Cal

iforn

ia 9

4965

415.

339.

2232

GR

AP

HIC

SP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S —

SH

EET

06

AS

CE

ND

ER

S O

F “

bld

” E

XT

EN

DT

O T

OP

OF

WA

LL

UP

PE

R F

LA

T P

AR

T O

F “

3”

AL

IGN

S W

ITH

TO

P O

F 2

ND

FL

OO

R E

NT

RY

BA

Y L

ED

GE

BO

TT

OM

CU

RV

ES

OF

“8

” a

nd

“3

”A

RE

CU

T O

FF

BY

GR

OU

ND

PL

AN

E

BO

TT

OM

LE

FT

CU

RV

E O

F “

8”

EX

TE

ND

S B

EN

EA

TH

CA

NO

PY

LO

WE

R F

LA

T P

AR

T O

F “

g”

AL

IGN

S W

ITH

TO

P O

F 3

RD

FL

OO

R B

RIC

K L

ED

GE

WE

ST

EL

EV

AT

ION

PR

EPA

RED

BY

2302

Bri

dgew

ay B

oule

vard

Saus

alito

, Cal

iforn

ia 9

4965

415.

339.

2232

GR

AP

HIC

SP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S —

SH

EET

07

VE

CT

OR

AR

TW

OR

K F

OR

LA

RG

E “

bld

g 8

13

”

PR

EPA

RED

BY

GR

AP

HIC

SP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S —

SH

EET

0823

02 B

ridg

eway

Bou

leva

rdSa

usal

ito, C

alifo

rnia

949

6541

5.33

9.22

32

EA

ST

EL

EV

AT

ION

“8

13

” G

RA

PH

IC D

ET

AIL

AS

CE

ND

ER

S O

F “

bld

” E

XT

EN

DT

O S

EC

ON

D F

LO

OR

WIN

DO

W S

ILL

S

BO

TT

OM

CU

RV

ES

OF

“8

” a

nd

“3

”A

RE

CU

T O

FF

BY

TO

P O

F W

IND

OW

SIL

L

“81

3”

IS P

AIN

TE

D T

O W

RA

P O

VE

RA

RC

HIT

EC

TU

RA

L L

IP O

F B

UIL

DIN

G

PR

EPA

RED

BY

2302

Bri

dgew

ay B

oule

vard

Saus

alito

, Cal

iforn

ia 9

4965

415.

339.

2232

GR

AP

HIC

SP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S —

SH

EET

09

SO

UT

H E

LE

VA

TIO

N “

81

3”

GR

AP

HIC

DE

TA

IL

AS

CE

ND

ER

S O

F “

bld

” E

XT

EN

DT

O S

EC

ON

D F

LO

OR

WIN

DO

W S

ILL

S

BO

TT

OM

CU

RV

ES

OF

“8

” a

nd

“3

”A

RE

CU

T O

FF

BY

TO

P O

F W

IND

OW

SIL

L

“81

3”

IS P

AIN

TE

D T

O W

RA

P O

VE

RA

RC

HIT

EC

TU

RA

L L

IP O

F B

UIL

DIN

G

PR

EPA

RED

BY

2302

Bri

dgew

ay B

oule

vard

Saus

alito

, Cal

iforn

ia 9

4965

415.

339.

2232

GR

AP

HIC

SP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S —

SH

EET

10

VE

CT

OR

AR

TW

OR

K F

OR

SM

AL

L “

bld

g 8

13

”

PR

EPA

RED

BY

2302

Bri

dgew

ay B

oule

vard

Saus

alito

, Cal

iforn

ia 9

4965

415.

339.

2232

GR

AP

HIC

SP

ECIF

ICAT

ION

S —

SH

EET

11


May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 10 14 00 - 1 Signage

SECTION 10 14 00

SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Section Includes (but is Not Necessarily Limited to): 1. Interior code-required signage:

a. Stairway identification. b. Emergency evacuation signage.

2. Lock box signage and lock box. 3. Exterior building entry requirements.

a. Information signage including open / closed, hours of operations, and permissible activities.

B. Contractor is responsible for providing all signage required by CAC Title 24 and ADA, whether specifically indicated or not, at no additional charge.


A. Division 26: Electrical.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

B. California Administrative Code, Title 24.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering,

artwork, and Braille layout.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify color selected. Resubmit samples until color, texture, sheen, and other specified criteria have been approved. 1. Panel Signs: Full-size samples of each type of sign required. 2. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character

(letter and number) required. Show character style, material, finish, and method of attachment.



3. Acrylic: Show representative color, thickness and surface finish. 4. Casting/ Exterior Sign Letters: Show representative texture, character style, spacing,

finish, and method of attachment. 5. Approved samples will be returned for installation into Project.

D. Graphic Images: 1. Submit full size patterns or prints of typical copy layouts and/or graphic elements to

be applied on signs. Using layouts on the Drawings as a guide, optically enlarge and hand correct images before submitting to the Architect for approval before fabrication.

2. Finished art of Project symbols and arrows will be provided by the Architect for photo enlargement to full-size dimensions shown on the Drawings. After photo enlargement, submit to the Architect for approval before fabrication.

3. Elevator Lobby fire evacuation map art shall be schematically presented. Submit camera ready artwork for all floors to the Architect for approval prior to fabrication.

E. Sign Location: Provide Graphic Schedule and location plans to identify and locate all signs. Item numbers listed in the Graphic Schedule shall be found on location plans and shall identify locations of specific sign items.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide the City Representative with proper cleaning instructions required for continued maintenance of signs.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Interior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility regulations and

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fire doors. b. Stairway identification. c. Emergency Evacuation Signage

B. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff and training to install materials, products and equipment per the specified requirements with a minimum of five years of experience with a record of successful in service performance on projects of similar scope and scale.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ASI Sign Systems Inc. 2. Mohawk Engraving Company, Inc. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Building Signage: Photopolymer tactile plaque with integral grade 2 Braille, (Basis of Design: ASI, "In-Touch" system or equal).



1. Sign Face: Polymer resin. 2. Carrier: Polyester, .011" thick. 3. Laminating Base: .125" thick acrylic with clear anodized aluminum finish. 4. Size:

a. Stair Identification: per Code b. Emergency Evacuation Signage: per Code

5. Braille: Braille to be relieved 1/32" min. from plaque surface by manufacturer's photomechanical stratification processes. Precisely formed, uniformly opaque Braille to comply with relevant ADA regulations and the requirements indicated for size, style, spacing, content, positions and colors. Translation of sign copy to be the responsibility of the manufacturer.

6. Colors: As selected from the manufacturer's high contrast standards. 7. Surface Texture: Matte. 8. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer. 9. Provide weatherproof signage at exterior installations.

B. Exterior Building Entry Requirements: 1. At entries: Wall-mounted, etched stainless steel plate.

a. Text: Provided by Owner. 2. Stainless Steel: Type 316. 1/4" inch plate, 3. Size: 16 inch by 24 inch. 4. Surface Finish: No. 6 Matte finish.

2.3 GRAPHIC LAYOUT

A. Emergency Evacuation Signage: 1. Provide tactile emergency evacuation signage as required by California

Administrative Code Title 24, and California State Fire Marshall Title 19. 2. Lettering: Type as selected by Architect. 3. Color, Size and Style: Conform with referenced code requirements and as approved

by the Architect. 4. Type: Laminated colored plastic, weatherproof, core color contrasting to exterior face

or solid plastic with inset symbols. 5. Layout: To be submitted by General Contractor for review and approval by Architect. 6. Sign layout and locations to be submitted and approved by Fire Marshall prior to

fabrication.

B. Lock Box Identification 1. Provide signs on access doors to lock box. 2. Type: Stamped or engraved into face of access door. 3. Size and Style: Conform with referenced code requirements and as approved by

Architect.

C. Lock Box: Knox-box for surface mount, 1/4-inch steel case, fully welded. 1. Surface lock box at west and east entries. 2. Type: As approved by local jurisdiction. 3. Size: As approved by local jurisdiction. 4. Series: As directed by Fire Department. 5. Finish: Zinc phosphate with black polyester powder coating or dark bronze or

aluminum, as selected by Architect. 6. Provide mounting kit and all other required mounting accessories. 7. Where indicated provide security key override switches for electrically activated

openings. 8. Coordinate and provide keying and type per fire/police department, and other

jurisdictional agency requirements.



D. Building Entry Requirements Signage: 1. At west and east entries:

a. Letter Size: Etched stainless steel plate. 1) Size: 1” high.

b. Style: Match City’s type face. c. Finish: Contrasting color. d. Text provided by Owner

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance.

B. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

C. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below: 1. Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth,

nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid-silicone adhesive recommended in writing

by sign manufacturer to attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape where recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to hold sign in place until adhesive has fully cured.

3. Mechanical Fasteners: Use non-removable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.

D. Install sign items, including all components, in accordance with reviewed Graphic Schedule at locations shown.

E. Install with reviewed manufacturer’s adhesive or mechanical fasteners after application of finish painting at heights noted.

3.2 CLEANING




May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 10 44 00-1 Fire Protection Specialties

SECTION 10 44 00

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Fire extinguishers and cabinets.

B. Brackets for fire extinguishers


A. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board: Roughed-in wall openings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.

B. Samples for Verification: For verification purposes in of each type of cabinet finish indicated, and each color, texture, and pattern specified prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Size: 6 by 6 inches (150 by 150 mm) square.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

C. Fire Extinguishers: Provide extinguishers which are UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire Extinguishing Agent: Provide clean agent which does not contain halons or HCFCs.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.

2.3 EXTINGUISHERS

A. Portable Fire Extinguisher: 1. J.L. Industries Type 4A-80BC, 10 lb. rating, J.L. Industries "Cosmic" #10 E. 2. Potter Roemer Fire Extinguisher 3305. Dry Chemical Type: UL 299, cast steel tank,

with pressure gage; UL Rating 2A-10B:C. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 00660.

2.4 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 1. Color: Red; MB846A

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in

red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Extinguisher: Steel, red enamel color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.

B. Identify locations intended for installation of cabinets.

C. Notify Fire Marshal to allow inspection and adjustment of final locations of extinguishers. Obtain approval of locations from Fire Marshal prior to installation.



D. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets to verify cabinet depth and mounting prior to cabinet installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 27 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet.

C. Install fire-rated cabinets in rated wall as required to maintain fire separation integrity of partition.

D. Attach mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets securely to studs or backing plates, square, plumb and level, in compliance with their manufacturer's instructions; do not attach to gypsum board with Molly or toggle bolts.

E. Secure rigidly in place.

F. Touch-up damaged finish, when the results are acceptable to the Architect, otherwise replace damaged components, at no cost to the City.

G. Place extinguishers in cabinets.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet manufacturer.

E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


ARUP HPSY: Building 813 LMS Project No.: 1007

May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 220500-1 Common Work Results for Plumbing

SECTION 220500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

B. Dielectric fittings. 1. Mechanical sleeve seals. 2. Sleeves. 3. Escutcheons. 4. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 5. Concrete bases. 6. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.



B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.

2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 1. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. 2. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling. 3. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.



D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC, PVC, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.6 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.



D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shape and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.8 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS – COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate



friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 1 inch above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/2-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and

pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in diameter.



3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

Q. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.



H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138

Appendix.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at

final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves

and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials

of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping

materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION – COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.



3.5 PAINTING

A. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches larger

in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified

in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete”.

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.8 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 221413-1 Facility Storm Drainage Piping

SECTION 221413

FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following storm drainage roof drainage and piping inside the building: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings. 3. Roof drains.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working-pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Storm Drainage Piping: 15-foot head of water.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures" and per authority having jurisdiction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For roof drain, pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.2 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with CISPI’s collective trademark or receive prior approval by the engineer of record.



1. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. a. Manufacturers:

1) ANACO. 2) Clamp-All Corp. 3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. 4) Mission Rubber Co. 5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. a. Manufacturers:

1) MG Piping Products Co.

2.3 ROOF DRAIN

Roof Drain Type: 2 & 4 or 5-inch RD

Description: Cast iron body, cast iron dome, no hub outlet, under deck clamp. Vandal proof galvanized dome. No-Hub roof drain connection. Outlet sizes 2” & 5”

Appropriate Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.

Body Material: Cast-iron.

Dome Material: Epoxy Painted Cast-iron.

Product: J.R.Smith Model 1010 (16” Diameter) ,Mifab, Zurn, or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground storm drainage piping shall be the following: 1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel

couplings; and coupled joints.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or

AWWA C105.

D. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.



E. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Storm Drain: Slope downward in direction of flow for piping as required by

code and per authority having jurisdiction.

F. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

G. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Provide insulation to horizontal storm drain piping below roof.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results Plumbing."

B. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod. 6. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited

to 60 inches.

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.



C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.

3.6 INSULATIONS-PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

3.7 PIPING INSULATION

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Horizontal Storm Drain at Ceiling: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:



1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 260500-1 Common Work Results for Electrical

SECTION 260500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section covers general work of all Sections under Division 26.

B. Provide a complete working electrical installation with all equipment called for in proper operating condition. Documents do not undertake to show or list every item to be provided. When an item not shown or listed is clearly necessary for proper operation of equipment which is shown or listed, provide the item which will allow the system to function properly at no increase in Contract Price.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and applicable portions of Divisions 1 and 26 apply to the work of this Section as if printed herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Forward all submittals in related groups. Individual or incomplete submittals are not acceptable.

B. Identify each item by manufacturer, brand, trade name, number, size, rating, or whatever other data is necessary to properly identify and check materials and equipment.

C. Identify each submittal item by reference to Specification Section paragraph in which item is specified or Drawing and Detail number.

D. Organize submittals in same sequence as they appear in Specification Sections, articles or paragraphs.

E. Shop Drawings shall show physical arrangement, construction details and finishes. 1. Drawings shall be drawn to scale and dimensioned where applicable. 2. Catalog cuts and published material may be included to supplement scale drawings.

F. Internal wiring diagrams of equipment shall show wiring as actually furnished for this project with all optional items clearly identified as included or excluded. Clearly identify external wiring connections. Identify and obliterate superfluous material.

G. Binders: Prepare submittal material in accordance with the following: 1. Insert all literature in standard 3-ring binders for 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch pages with

individual tabs. Do not staple literature on different products together. 2. Number all binders on the outside of the cover and indicate the Specification Section.

Mark Binder No. 1 Architect's copy and No. 2 Engineer's copy. Both of these binders shall contain original manufacturer's literature.

3. Provide an index with binder. This index shall follow the same sequence as the Specifications.



H. Submittal literature, drawings and wiring diagrams shall be specifically applicable to this Project and shall not contain extraneous material or optional choices. Clearly mark literature to indicate the proposed item. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to those items listed in individual Sections. 1. Include all physical and performance data, including materials, manufacturer's

names, model numbers, weights, sizes, capacities, performance curves, finishes, colors, accessories and all other data required to completely describe equipment and to indicate complete compliance with Specifications and Drawings.

2. Include with complete submittals above, complete, large scale, dimensioned Shop Drawings, certified by manufacturer, of all major equipment and other equipment as directed by Architect.

I. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 00 66 00 – Product Requirements.

J. Resubmittals will be reviewed for compliance with comment made on the original submittal only and should be marked with a resubmittal number and dated.

K. Operating & Maintenance Instructions and Manuals: 1. Subsequent to final completions and testing operations, instruct the Owner's

authorized representatives in operation, adjustment and maintenance of electrical plant.

2. Submit three (3) copies of certificate, signed by Owner's Representatives, attesting to their having been instructed.

3. Before Owner's personnel assume operation of systems, submit three (3) sets of operating maintenance manuals. Bind data in vinyl covered loose-leaf binders with title index tabs identifying items therein to include: a. Lighting Controls b. Panelboard c. Molded case circuit breakers

4. Provide two (2) full size prints of Record Drawing One-Line Diagram, in metal frame with glass front. Obtain record drawing prints from Architect at Contractor's cost and have prints framed in location as directed.

L. Submit as-built drawings showing actual constructed conditions, in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 78 39 – Record Documents.


A. Materials and Systems: 1. Labels: Provide materials listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories or testing

firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction, where listing service is normally provided for product.

2. Materials: Provide new and ship to jobsite in original manufacturer's containers or bundles.

B. Workmanship: Arrange work to obtain coordinated installation.

C. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable codes, laws, rules, regulations, and standards of applicable code-enforcing authorities.

D. References and Standards: All materials and equipment shall comply with all applicable standards and requirements of the standards listed below. Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit Work not conforming to applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations. It is not the intent of Drawings or Specifications to repeat requirements of codes except where necessary for completeness or clarity.



1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 3. National Electrical Code (NEC) (NFPA-70, 2002 Edition). 4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 6. Uniform Building Code (UBC). 7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 8. Codes and regulations noted in other Sections in Division 26, applicable State and

Local Codes and Ordinances.

E. If any of the requirements of the above are in conflict with one another, or with the requirements of these specifications, the most stringent requirement shall govern.


A. Protect from loss or damage. Replace lost or damaged materials and equipment with new at no increase in Contract Sum.

1.6 DRAWINGS AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK

A. Drawings: 1. For purposes of clarity, legibility, Drawings are essentially diagrammatic. 2. Exact routing of wiring and locations of outlets, panels, etc., shall be governed by

structural conditions, obstructions and existing conditions. Architect reserves right, at no increase in price, to make any reasonable change in locations of electrical items, exposed at ceiling and/or on walls, to group them into orderly relationships and/or increase their utility. Contractor shall verify Architect's requirements in this regard prior to roughing-in.

3. Dimensions, location of doors, partitions, similar physical features shall be taken from Architectural Drawings for exact location of outlets to center with Architectural features, panels, etc., at the approximate location shown on Electrical Drawings.

4. Mounting heights of brackets, outlets, etc., shall be as required to suit equipment served.

5. Drawings indicate, generally, routes of all branch circuits. All runs to panels are indicated as starting from nearest outlet, pointing in direction of panel. Continue all such circuits to panel as though routes were indicated in their entirety.

B. Coordination: 1. Work out all "tight" conditions involving Work specified in this Division in advance of

installation. If necessary, and before Work proceeds in these areas, prepare supplementary Drawings for review, showing all Work in "tight" area. Provide supplementary Drawings and additional Work necessary to overcome "tight" conditions.

2. Differences or disputes concerning coordination, interference or extent of Work between trades shall be decided by Contractor. His decision, if consistent with Contract Documents requirements, shall be final.

3. Coordinate electrical power and control wiring requirements of mechanical equipment specified in Division 23. a. Where conflict exists between rough-in shown on drawings and that shown or

required by equipment to be installed, obtain clarification from Architect and provide rough-in as directed.

4. Provide templates, information and instructions to other trades to properly locate holes and openings to be cut or provided for Electrical Work.

C. Large Scale Layout Drawings: In accordance with requirements of Section 01 78 39, prepare large scale detailed layout Drawings showing locations of equipment, conduit runs,



panels, and all other elements of electrical systems where required by other Sections of this Division, plus sections of all congested areas to show relative position and spacing of affected elements. All symbols and designations used in preparing record Drawings shall match those used in Contract Drawings.

D. Equipment Rough-In: 1. Rough-in locations shown on Electrical Drawings for equipment furnished by Owner

and for equipment specified in other Divisions are approximate only. a. Obtain exact rough-in locations from following sources:

1) From shop drawings for Contractor-furnished and installed equipment. 2) From Architect for Owner-furnished Contractor-installed equipment.

2. Verify electrical characteristics of equipment before starting rough-in. Where conflict exists between equipment and rough-in shown on Drawings obtain clarification from Architect and provide as directed.

3. Unless otherwise shown or specified, provide direct raceway and conductor connections from building wiring system to equipment terminals for direct connected equipment which is Contractor furnished and Contractor installed, Owner furnished and Contractor installed.

4. Provide plug-in receptacle cap for cord connected equipment which is Contractor furnished and Contractor installed, Owner furnished and Contractor installed. Provide new cord and cap if required on Owner furnished and Contractor installed equipment.

5. Provide disconnect switches, flush type in finished spaces, where shown or required by code for direct connected equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS FURNISHED

A. New, bearing label of Underwriters Laboratories, or other testing laboratory acceptable to authority having jurisdiction, where labeling exists for the class of equipment.

B. Provide equipment of one manufacturer, alike in appearance and function.

C. For equipment specified by manufacturer's number, include all accessories, controls, etc., listed in catalogue as standard with equipment. Furnish optional or additional accessories as specified.

D. Where no specific make of material or equipment is mentioned, use any product of reputable manufacturer which conforms to requirements of system and other applicable specification sections.

E. Equipment and material damaged during transportation, installation, or operation is considered as totally damaged. Replace with new. Variance from this permitted only with written approval.

F. Provide an authorized representative to constantly supervise Work specified in this Division; check all materials prior to installation for conformance with Drawings, Specifications and reviewed Shop Drawings.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Manufacturer's Directions: Follow in all cases where manufacturers of articles used furnish directions covering points not specified or shown.

B. Equipment: Accurately set and leveled with supports neatly placed and properly fastened as shown and specified. Provide means of bringing in and installing equipment into position inside building.

C. Conduit Systems: 1. Worked into complete, integrated arrangement with like elements to make Work neat

appearing, finished. 2. Run concealed, except as shown or noted otherwise. Where exposed, install parallel

with walls or structural elements: vertical runs plumb; horizontal runs level or parallel with structure as appropriate: groups racked together neatly with straight runs and bends both parallel and uniformly spaced.

3. Install as high as practicable to maintain adequate head room shown or required. Coordinate with Work of other trades to achieve proper headroom.

4. Flash and counter-flash all conduits through roof in accordance with requirements of Section 07 60 00 – Flashing and Sheet Metal.

5. Clearance: Do not obstruct spaces required by code in front of electrical equipment, access doors, etc.

D. Penetrations: 1. Pack space between conduit, sleeve in walls with non-combustible materials. 2. Make penetrations through floors water-tight with non-hardening sealant even though

concealed within wall or furred space. 3. Make penetrations through any damp-proofed/water-proofed surfaces damp-

proof/waterproof by appropriate means to maintain integrity of system penetrated. 4. Seal around penetrations with fireproofing material to maintain integrity of fire rating

where occurs.

E. Provide shrouds at light fixtures, electrical panelboards and like items to maintain integrity of rated wall or ceiling construction.

F. Hangers, Supports, Anchors and Chases: 1. Provide complete as required for installation of Electrical Work. Support and/or

anchor all equipment and wiring systems to resist gravity and seismic forces in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code and in compliance with conditions stated in the Contract Documents.

2. Supporting components shall be constructed of metal only: no wood or combustible material will be permitted including supports for outlet boxes.

3. Hangers, anchors and supports for conduit runs: As specified. 4. Provide concrete inserts for attachment of hangers; subject to structural engineer's

review. 5. Provide anchors for floor and wall mounted equipment. 6. Provide supports for wall mounted equipment.

3.2 PERFORMANCE

A. Excavating and Backfilling: 1. Provide as required for installation of electrical work in accordance with requirements

of Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork.



2. Provide all necessary shoring, sheeting and pumping. 3. In any asphalt or concrete paved areas, backfill only to subgrade level.

B. Concrete: In accordance with the requirements of Division 3.

C. Sleeves, Chases and Concrete Inserts: 1. Provide sleeves, chases, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, etc., before concrete is

poured. 2. Sleeves, chases are prohibited in structural members, except where shown or

approved in writing.

D. Cutting and Repairing: 1. Do all cutting, repairing, including structural reinforcing, necessary for Work specified

in this Division. 2. Do no cutting or patching without approval. Repair damage done by this cutting

equal to original condition in Architect's opinion.

E. Painting: Include surface preparation, priming and finish coating for electrical cabinets, exposed conduit, pull and junction boxes. Refer to Section 09 90 00 – Painting.

3.3 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Furnish all labor and test equipment required for testing specified in this Division.

B. Test panels and branch circuits for grounds or shorts. Repair defective wiring as required.

C. Test each individual circuit at panel for proper operation.

D. Upon completion of Work, make final inspection and operate equipment under normal conditions to satisfaction of Architect.

E. At completion of Work, provide written certification that all systems are functioning properly without defects.

F. Test all feeders for line-to-ground and line-to-line resistance with a 500 VDC motor driven "Megger". Minimum acceptable resistance is 100 meg-ohms. Schedule all feeders and indicate line-to-ground and line-to-line resistances. Have all tests witnessed by Architect or his authorized representative.

G. Perform testing at a time suitable to the Architect and Owner. Advise the Architect a minimum of two weeks prior to testing so that he can arrange to be present if he desires.

H. Provide for Grounding System: Test for ground currents with all equipment energized. Include ground impedance test by 2 or 3 point fall-of-potential method.

I. Submit six (6) sets of test reports for review.

3.4 CLEANING AND PAINTING

A. Properly prepare Work to be finish painted as specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting.

B. Refinish damaged Work supplied with final finish to satisfaction of Architect.

C. After other Work is accomplished, clean exposed conduit, panels (interiors and exteriors), fixtures, equipment and leave in satisfactory condition.



3.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Refer to Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems for equipment identification requirements.

3.6 VOLTAGE CHECK

A. At completion of job, check voltage at several points of utilization on the system which has been installed under this Contract. During test, energize all installed loads.

B. Adjust taps on transformers to give proper voltage, which is 118 to 122 volts for 120-volt nominal systems and proportionately equivalent for higher voltage systems. If proper voltage cannot be obtained, inform the Architect and the Owner.



Low Voltage Electrical May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 260519-1 Power Conductors and Cable

SECTION 260519

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Building wire and cable.

B. Wiring connectors and connections.


A. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 05 33 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data for each conductor type on: 1. Insulation. 2. Conductor material and dimensions.

C. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.


A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01 31 13 – Project Coordination.

B. Determine required separation between cable and other work.

C. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Marking: Insulation type, voltage rating, size and listing label shall be printed with permanent white markings repeating along entire length of conductor.

B. Provide all new wire and cable, manufactured within 12 months of delivery to site and continuously stored where protected from heat and weather.

C. Conductor packaging and reels: Plainly marked or tagged with Manufacturer's name, AWG, size, voltage rating, insulation type, agency listing and date of manufacture.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS – BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: National, General Cable, Carol, Southwire, Rome, ITT Royal.

B. Substitutions: Under provision of Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.

2.3 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

B. Conductor: Copper, solid or stranded for size 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded for size 8 AWG and larger. All fire alarm wiring shall be solid conductor.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, type THHN/THWN, XHHW or THW.

E. Color Coding: All power conductors identified as to phase and voltage by means of color impregnated insulation, as follows:

Voltage ØA ØB ØC Neutral Ground

120/208V Black Red Blue White Green

277/480V Brown Orange Yellow White Green

For wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, color banding tape, minimum 2 inches wide, may be

used at all accessible locations in lieu of colored insulation.

2.4 MANUFACTURERS – CONTROL CABLE

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Alpha, Belden.

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.

2.5 MULTI-CONDUCTOR CONTROL CABLE

A. Description: Multi-conductor insulated cable with color-coded PVC insulation over each conductor and an overall PVC jacket.

B. Conductor: Copper, stranded.



C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600V.

D. Temperature Rating: -20 degrees C to +80 degrees C.

E. Agency Certification: UL recognized, passes VW-1 flame test.

2.6 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Split Bolt Connectors: 1. Burndy, "Servit" K series. 2. Thomas & Betts "Locktite" T series. 3. Or equal.

B. Solderless Pressure Connectors: 1. Burndy, "Qiklink" QR or "Qiklug" Q2 series. 2. Thomas & Betts "Locktite" 32000 series. 3. Or equal.

C. Spring Wire Connectors: 1. 3M "Ranger" 2. Ideal "Wingnut" 3. Or equal.

D. Compression Connectors: 1. Burndy "Hylink" YS Series 2. Thomas & Betts "Color-Keyed" 54500 Series 3. Or equal.

2.7 INSULATION

A. Insulating Tape: 1. 3M "Scotch" #33 2. Manville "Bulldog" #166 3. Or equal.

B. Heat-Shrink Tubing: 1. Raychem. 2. Or equal.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Vertical Cable Supports: 1. O-Z/Gedney, Type "M" 2. Adalet, "SVM" series 3. Or equal.

B. Conductor Ties: 1. Panduit, "Pan-ty" 2. Thomas & Betts, "Ty-rap" 3. Or equal.

C. Conductor Sealant (above ground): 1. Dow-Corning, #795 silicone 2. General Electric, #SCS1000 silicone 3. Or equal.



D. Conductor Sealant (below ground): 1. Polywater “Duct Sealant” FST 2. Arnco “Hydra-Seal” S60STF 3. Or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.

B. Deliver all conductors to the site on their original cable reels or in their original unbroken packages.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Install all conductors used for power and fire alarm in conduit or approved raceway systems.

B. Install conductors used for low voltage control systems in conduit or approved raceway systems, unless conductors used have specific agency listing for direct installation in ceiling plenums.

C. Install all exposed conductors and conductors concealed in walls or inaccessible ceilings and spaces in conduit or approved raceway systems. Gypsum board ceilings are considered inaccessible even where there are access panels.

D. In dry interior locations, use type THHN/THWN or THW.

E. In wet or damp interior locations, use type THWN, THW or XHHW.

F. In exterior locations, including underground installations, use type THWN or XHHW.

G. Make wire connections on conductors #10 AWG and smaller with spring wire connectors.

H. Make wire connections and splices on conductors #8 AWG and larger with solderless pressure connectors, compression connectors or split-bolt connectors.

I. Tape all connections made with non-insulated type connectors with insulating tape to 150 percent of the insulating value of the conductor insulation.

J. Seal around conductors with silicone sealant where conduit passes through exterior walls above grade.

K. For underground conduits, seal around conductors at nearest access point outside the building using foaming sealant.



L. Tag all conductors in junction boxes, pull boxes and wireways, indicating panelboard and circuit number.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.

C. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.

D. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet to first outlet.

E. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet to first outlet.

F. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.

G. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.

3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.

B. At each junction or pullbox, identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings.


A. Perform field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.

B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.

C. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values.

D. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor.



Grounding and Bonding May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 260526-1 for Electrical Systems

SECTION 260526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Grounding electrodes and conductors.

B. Equipment grounding conductors.

C. Bonding.


A. Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel

B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code

1.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM

A. Metal underground water pipe.

B. Metal frame of the building.

C. Concrete-encased electrode.

D. Metal underground gas piping system.

E. Rod electrode.


A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for grounding electrodes and connections.

C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of exothermic connectors.



1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents.

B. Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience.



B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROD ELECTRODE

A. Manufacturers: 1. Blackburn 2. Erico 3. Or equal.

B. Material: Copper.

C. Diameter: 3/4-inch.

D. Length: 10 feet.

2.2 COMPRESSION CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Thomas & Betts all-copper compression system. 2. Burndy "Hyground" compression system. 3. Or equal.

B. Material: All copper.

2.3 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Cadweld 2. Thermoweld 3. Burndyweld 4. Or equal.

2.4 WIRE

A. Material: Stranded copper.



B. Concrete Encased Electrodes: 4/0 AWG.

C. Grounding Electrode conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.

2.5 GROUNDING WELL COMPONENTS

A. Well Pipe: 12 inch diameter by 24 inches long concrete pipe with belled end.

B. Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground.

C. Provide grounding well pipe with cover at each rod location, rod locations where indicated. Install well pipe top flush with finished grade.

D. Provide 4/0 grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing where indicated.

E. Provide bonding to meet regulatory requirements.

F. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.

G. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.


A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.

B. Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method.



Hangers and Supports May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 260529-1 for Electrical Systems

SECTION 260529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Design, furnish and install all required supports and bracing for electrical wiring systems and equipment.

B. This specification section covers components to be used for such supporting systems, including but not limited to: 1. Conduit supports. 2. Equipment supports. 3. Equipment anchoring and supports. 4. Fastening hardware.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 41 00 – Regulatory Requirements.

B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.

C. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications: Hangers.

D. Section 09 53 00 – Acoustical Ceiling Suspension Assemblies.

E. Section 26 05 33 – Raceway and Boxes.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.


A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they carry.

1.5 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY

A. Design support and anchorage systems to resist all gravity and seismic forces in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code and in accordance with procedures in Section 01 41 00 – Regulatory Requirements.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit dimensioned layout drawings, details, locations and structural calculations for gravity and seismic support systems. Include plans, elevations and all necessary information to satisfy the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Calculations shall be prepared and signed by a professionally registered Structural Engineer.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE FASTENERS

A. Drilled wedge expansion type concrete anchors, Phillips "Red-Head" WS series, Ramset "Trubolt" or equal.

B. Provide powder driven concrete fasteners with washers by Remington, Ramset, or equal.

C. Drilled sleeve type expansion anchors, Ramset "Dynabolt," "Red-Head" RM series or equal.

2.2 CONDUIT STRAPS

A. Hot-dip galvanized, cast malleable iron, one hole type strap with cast clamp-backs and spacers as required.

B. OZ/Gedney "14-G" series strap and "141G" series spacer; Efcor "231" series strap and "131" series spacer; Thomas & Betts "1276" series strap and "1350" series spacer, or equal.

2.3 CONCRETE INSERTS

A. Pressed galvanized steel, spot insert, with oval slot capable of accepting support nuts of 1/4-inch to 1/2-inch diameter thread.

B. Unistrut No. M24 with "M2506" series nut; Superstrut No. 425 with "AB-102" series nut, Kinline No. 279 with "660" series nut, or equal.

2.4 DECK INSERTS

A. Steel plate 3/16-inch thick with threaded galvanized steel rod sized for load.

B. Superstrut No. C-475 series, Kinline No. 293 series, or equal.

2.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANNEL

A. 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch, 12-gauge galvanized steel channel with 9/16-inch diameter bolt holes, 1-7/8 inch on center, in the base of the channel.

B. Superstrut A-1200-P, Unistrut P-1000-HS, Kinline 4112-PO, or equal.

2.6 THREADED ROD

A. Galvanized rod, sized for the load unless otherwise shown or specified.

2.7 CABLE TIES AND CLAMPS

A. Thomas and Betts Co. "Ty-Raps," Panduit "Pan-ty" or equal, one piece, nylon, reusable tape lashing ties.

2.8 BEAM CLAMPS

A. Beam clamps shall attach to both flanges of a beam, provide double-flange type clamps. Single-flange clamps are unacceptable.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide supporting devices as noted in other Sections of Division 26.

B. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, outlet and junction boxes to building structure using precast inserts, expansion anchors, preset inserts or beam clamps.

C. Use hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry walls.

D. Use expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls.

E. Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors on concrete surfaces.

F. Powder activated anchors may only be used if first accepted in writing by the Architect.

G. Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction.

H. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.

I. Do not drill structural steel members unless first accepted in writing by the Architect.

J. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.

K. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with a minimum of four anchors. Provide additional support backing in stud walls prior to sheet rocking as required to adequately support cabinets and panels.

L. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls.

M. Anchor free-standing equipment on concrete pads where indicated.

3.2 LAYOUT

A. Layout support devices to maintain headroom, neat mechanical appearance and to support equipment loads.

3.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section covers general work of all Sections under Division 26.

B. Provide a complete working electrical installation with all equipment called for in proper operating condition. Documents do not undertake to show or list every item to be provided. When an item not shown or listed is clearly necessary for proper operation of equipment which is shown or listed, provide the item which will allow the system to function properly at no increase in Contract Price.

3.4 REFERENCES

A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and applicable portions of Divisions 1 and 26 apply to the work of this Section as if printed herein.



3.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Forward all submittals in related groups. Individual or incomplete submittals are not acceptable.

B. Identify each item by manufacturer, brand, trade name, number, size, rating, or whatever other data is necessary to properly identify and check materials and equipment.

C. Identify each submittal item by reference to Specification Section paragraph in which item is specified or Drawing and Detail number.

D. Organize submittals in same sequence as they appear in Specification Sections, articles or paragraphs.

E. Shop Drawings shall show physical arrangement, construction details and finishes. 1. Drawings shall be drawn to scale and dimensioned where applicable. 2. Catalog cuts and published material may be included to supplement scale drawings.

F. Internal wiring diagrams of equipment shall show wiring as actually furnished for this project with all optional items clearly identified as included or excluded. Clearly identify external wiring connections. Identify and obliterate superfluous material.

G. Binders: Prepare submittal material in accordance with the following: 1. Insert all literature in standard 3-ring binders for 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch pages with

individual tabs. Do not staple literature on different products together. 2. Number all binders on the outside of the cover and indicate the Specification Section.

Mark Binder No. 1 Architect's copy and No. 2 Engineer's copy. Both of these binders shall contain original manufacturer's literature.

3. Provide an index with binder. This index shall follow the same sequence as the Specifications.

H. Submittal literature, drawings and wiring diagrams shall be specifically applicable to this Project and shall not contain extraneous material or optional choices. Clearly mark literature to indicate the proposed item. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to those items listed in individual Sections. 1. Include all physical and performance data, including materials, manufacturer's

names, model numbers, weights, sizes, capacities, performance curves, finishes, colors, accessories and all other data required to completely describe equipment and to indicate complete compliance with Specifications and Drawings.

2. Include with complete submittals above, complete, large scale, dimensioned Shop Drawings, certified by manufacturer, of all major equipment and other equipment as directed by Architect.

I. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements.

J. Resubmittals will be reviewed for compliance with comment made on the original submittal only and should be marked with a resubmittal number and dated.

K. Operating & Maintenance Instructions and Manuals: 1. Subsequent to final completions and testing operations, instruct the Owner's

authorized representatives in operation, adjustment and maintenance of electrical plant.

2. Submit three (3) copies of certificate, signed by Owner's Representatives, attesting to their having been instructed.



3. Before Owner's personnel assume operation of systems, submit three (3) sets of operating maintenance manuals. Bind data in vinyl covered loose-leaf binders with title index tabs identifying items therein to include: a. Switchgear and Panelboards b. Motor Control Equipment c. Transformers d. Fire Alarm System e. Lighting Controls

4. Provide two (2) full size prints of Record Drawing One-Line Diagram, in metal frame with glass front. Obtain record drawing prints from Architect at Contractor's cost and have prints framed in location as directed.

L. Submit as-built drawings showing actual constructed conditions, in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 78 39 – Record Documents.


A. Materials and Systems: 1. Labels: Provide materials listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories or testing

firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction, where listing service is normally provided for product.

2. Materials: Provide new and ship to jobsite in original manufacturer's containers or bundles.

B. Workmanship: Arrange work to obtain coordinated installation.

C. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable codes, laws, rules, regulations, and standards of applicable code-enforcing authorities.

D. References and Standards: All materials and equipment shall comply with all applicable standards and requirements of the standards listed below. Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit Work not conforming to applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations. It is not the intent of Drawings or Specifications to repeat requirements of codes except where necessary for completeness or clarity. 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 3. National Electrical Code (NEC) (NFPA-70, 2002 Edition). 4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 6. Uniform Building Code (UBC). 7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 8. Codes and regulations noted in other Sections in Division 26, applicable State and

Local Codes and Ordinances.

E. If any of the requirements of the above are in conflict with one another, or with the requirements of these specifications, the most stringent requirement shall govern.


A. Protect from loss or damage. Replace lost or damaged materials and equipment with new at no increase in Contract Sum.

3.8 DRAWINGS AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK

A. Drawings:



1. For purposes of clarity, legibility, Drawings are essentially diagrammatic. 2. Exact routing of wiring and locations of outlets, panels, etc. shall be governed by

structural conditions, obstructions and existing conditions. Architect reserves right, at no increase in price, to make any reasonable change in locations of electrical items, exposed at ceiling and/or on walls, to group them into orderly relationships and/or increase their utility. Contractor shall verify Architect's requirements in this regard prior to roughing-in.

3. Dimensions, location of doors, partitions, and similar physical features shall be taken from Architectural Drawings for exact location of outlets to center with Architectural features, panels, etc. at the approximate location shown on Electrical Drawings.

4. Mounting heights of brackets, outlets, etc. shall be as required to suit equipment served.

5. Drawings indicate, generally, routes of all branch circuits. All runs to panels are indicated as starting from nearest outlet, pointing in direction of panel. Continue all such circuits to panel as though routes were indicated in their entirety.

B. Coordination: 1. Work out all "tight" conditions involving Work specified in this Division in advance of

installation. If necessary, and before Work proceeds in these areas, prepare supplementary Drawings for review, showing all Work in "tight" area. Provide supplementary Drawings and additional Work necessary to overcome "tight" conditions.

2. Differences or disputes concerning coordination, interference or extent of Work between trades shall be decided by Contractor. His decision, if consistent with Contract Documents requirements, shall be final.

3. Coordinate electrical power and control wiring requirements of mechanical equipment specified in Division 23. a. Where conflict exists between rough-in shown on drawings and that shown or

required by equipment to be installed, obtain clarification from Architect and provide rough-in as directed.

4. Provide templates, information and instructions to other trades to properly locate holes and openings to be cut or provided for Electrical Work.

C. Large Scale Layout Drawings: In accordance with requirements of Section 01 78 39, prepare large scale detailed layout Drawings showing locations of equipment, conduit runs, panels, and all other elements of electrical systems where required by other Sections of this Division, plus sections of all congested areas to show relative position and spacing of affected elements. All symbols and designations used in preparing record Drawings shall match those used in Contract Drawings.

D. Equipment Rough-In: 1. Rough-in locations shown on Electrical Drawings for equipment furnished by Owner

and for equipment specified in other Divisions are approximate only. a. Obtain exact rough-in locations from following sources:

1) From shop drawings for Contractor-furnished and installed equipment. 2) From Architect for Owner-furnished Contractor-installed equipment.

2. Verify electrical characteristics of equipment before starting rough-in. Where conflict exists between equipment and rough-in shown on Drawings obtain clarification from Architect and provide as directed.

3. Unless otherwise shown or specified, provide direct raceway and conductor connections from building wiring system to equipment terminals for direct connected equipment which is Contractor furnished and Contractor installed, Owner furnished and Contractor installed.

4. Provide plug-in receptacle cap for cord connected equipment which is Contractor furnished and Contractor installed, Owner furnished and Contractor installed.



Provide new cord and cap if required on Owner furnished and Contractor installed equipment.

5. Provide disconnect switches, flush type in finished spaces, where shown or required by code for direct connected equipment.



Raceway and Boxes May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 260533-1 for Electrical Systems

SECTION 260533

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Conduit: 1. Rigid metal conduit and fittings. 2. Intermediate metal conduit and fittings. 3. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings. 4. Flexible metal conduit and fittings. 5. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit and fittings. 6. Non-metallic conduit and fittings.

B. Other Raceway: 1. Surface metal raceways. 2. Multi-outlet assemblies. 3. Wireways.

C. Boxes: 1. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. 2. Floor boxes. 3. Pull and junction boxes.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching.

B. Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill.

C. Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Forming: Conduit sizes allowed in slabs.

D. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete: Protective envelope for underground conduit installations.

E. Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

F. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping

G. Section 08 31 00 – Access Doors and Panels

H. Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C80.1 – Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated.

B. ANSI C80.3 – Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated.

C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 – Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.



D. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 – Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.

E. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 – Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.

F. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC).

G. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) Standard of Installation.

H. NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

I. NEMA RN 1 – PVC Externally-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing.

J. NEMA TC 2 – Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).

K. NEMA TC 3 – PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

L. NEMA WD 6 – Wiring Device Configurations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. List of conduit types indicating where each type will be used.

C. List of box construction, size and finish indicating where each type will be used.

D. Raceway dimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials, fabrication details, finishes, and accessories.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.

B. Maintain one copy of document on site.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience.



B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.


A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.



B. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets prior to rough-in.

C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose. Include installation within 10 feet of location shown.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Full weight, threaded, hot-dip galvanized, inside enameled, conforming to ANSI C80.1. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Allied b. National c. Triangle d. Or equal.

B. PVC Externally Coated Conduit: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external 40 mil PVC coating and internal galvanized surface. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Perma-cote b. Robroy c. Or equal.

C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit. 1. Rigid steel fittings:

a. Three-piece Couplings: Zinc-plated, malleable iron. OZ/Gedney "4-" series, Thomas & Betts "675" series or equal.

b. Hubs: Zinc-plated, malleable iron, with insulated throat. OZ/Gedney "CHM-T" series, Thomas & Betts "401" series or equal.

c. Insulated Bushings: Zinc-plated, malleable iron, with 150 degrees C rated, molded-on high impact phenolic thermosetting insulation. OZ/Gedney "B" series, Thomas & Betts "BIM" series, or equal.

d. Insulated Grounding Bushings: Zinc-plated, malleable iron, with 150 degrees C rated, molded-on phenolic insulation and tin plated copper saddle for grounding conductor. OZ/Gedney "BLG" series, Thomas & Betts "3870" series or equal.

e. Expansion Fittings: Up to 2 inches, OZ/Gedney "TX" series in open areas and "TX" together with "DX" series in cored openings. Above 2 inches, OZ/Gedney "AX8" series in open areas and "AX8" together with "DX" series in cored openings. All fittings complete with bonding jumper.

2. Conduit bodies: Zinc plated, malleable iron with tapered threaded hubs. OZ/Gedney "Spec 5" series, Appleton "Form 35" series or equal.

2.2 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) AND FITTINGS

A. Conduit: Galvanized steel. 1. Manufacturers:




B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; use fittings and conduit bodies specified above for rigid steel conduit.

2.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS

A. EMT: Formed of cold rolled strip steel, electrical resistance welded, hot dip galvanized, conforming to ANSI C80.3. 1. Manufacturers:


B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; concrete tight, set screw type. 1. Connectors: Zinc plated, steel body with malleable iron nut and insulated throat.

OZ/Gedney "4050ST" series, Thomas & Betts "5031" series or equal. 2. Couplings: Zinc plated steel, OZ/Gedney "5050S" series, Thomas & Betts "5030"

series or equal. 3. Conduit Bodies: Die cast, copper-free aluminum with set-screw hubs. OZ/Gedney

"LB-50A-TW" series, Appleton "LB-50T-A" series or equal.

2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Conduit: Fabricated in continuous length from galvanized steel strip, spirally wound and formed to provide an interlocking design. 1. Manufacturers:

a. AFC b. Alflex c. National d. Or equal.

B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1, steel or malleable iron with insulated throat. Thomas & Betts "Tite-Bite 3110" series, OZ Gedney "KC-50T" series or equal.

2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with grey PVC jacket, integral ground conductor. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Electri-flex, type LA b. Alflex c. AFC d. Or equal.

B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1, steel or malleable iron with nylon insulated throat. Thomas & Betts "5330" series, OZ Gedney "4Q-50T" series or equal.

2.6 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Conduit: Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit, Schedule 40, conforming to NEMA TC 2 and listed for exposed and direct burial applications. With integral belled ends on straight sections and elbows. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Carlon Plus 40 b. Pacific Western c. Or equal.



B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.

2.7 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY

A. Manufacturers 1. Wiremold, Model G4000 2. Hubbell 3. Thomas & Betts 4. Or equal.

B. Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal raceway.

C. Size: Approximately 4-1/2 inches by 1-1/2 inches.

D. Finish: Gray enamel.

E. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension rings: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories.

2.8 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLY

A. Manufacturers: 1. Wiremold, Model 2000 2. Hubbell 3. Thomas & Betts 4. Or equal.

B. Multi-Outlet Assembly: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, with pre-wired receptacles, suitable for use as multi-outlet assembly.

C. Size: Approximately 1 inch by 3/4-inch.

D. Receptacles: NEMA WD 6, type 5-15R, single receptacle.

E. Receptacle Spacing: 12 inches.

F. Receptacle Color: Gray.

G. Channel Finish: Gray enamel.

H. Fittings: Furnish manufacturer's standard couplings, elbows, and connectors.

2.9 WIREWAY

A. Manufacturers: 1. Circle A-W, 6600F series 2. Square D, LD61 series 3. Or equal.

B. Description: General purpose type wireway.

C. Knockouts: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Size: 6 inches by 6 inches.



E. Cover: Hinged cover.

F. Connector: Slip-in.

G. Fittings: Lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive screws.

H. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish.

2.10 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. Minimum size 4 inches square, unless otherwise noted. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Steel City b. Raco c. Bowers d. Or equal.

B. Luminaire and equipment supporting boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2-inch male fixture studs where required.

C. Concrete ceiling boxes: Concrete type, 4 inch octagonal.

D. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. Manufacturers: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds or equal.

2.11 FLOOR BOXES

A. Floor Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, fully adjustable before and after concrete pour, cast metal body, rectangular, complete with all necessary fittings.

B. For Pullbox or Flush Outlets: 1. Steel City 640 series. 2. Walker 880CS series. 3. Hubbell B-2436/B-4233/B-4333 series.

C. Conform to regulatory requirements for concrete-tight floor boxes.

2.12 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

B. Surface-Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box. 1. Material: Cast aluminum. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover

screws.

C. In-Ground Cast Metal Box for Pedestrian or Light Vehicular Traffic Areas: NEMA 250, Type 6, flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting. 1. Material: Cast aluminum. 2. Cover: Nonskid cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 3. Cover legend: Electric. 4. Manufacturers: Crouse-Hinds, Appleton or equal.



D. Precast Concrete Handholes for Vehicular Traffic: 1. Concrete handhole complete with body, cover, solid base and necessary extensions. 2. Cover shall be superimposed steel traffic type and secured with recessed hold-down

bolts. 3. Size of handholes as indicated on drawings. 4. Cover legend: Electric. 5. Manufacturers:

a. Brooks Products b. Christy c. Forni d. Or equal.

2.13 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. Conduit Clamps, Straps, and Supports: See Section 26 05 29 – Hangers & Supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT

A. Size conduit per NEC for conductor type installed or for Type THW conductors, whichever is larger; 3/4-inch minimum size.

B. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance.

C. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping.

D. Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating appliances.

E. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers.

F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for 25 percent additional conduit on racks.

G. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for temporary conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled.

H. Support conduit at a maximum of seven feet on center.

3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.

B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings, fully seat and fasten securely.

C. Use conduit hubs for fastening threaded conduit to sheet metal boxes, and for fastening conduit to enclosures in damp or wet locations.

D. Install no more than the equivalent of three, 90-degree bends between boxes.



E. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams.

F. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger than 2 inch size.

G. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point.

H. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.

I. Provide No. 12 AWG insulated conductor or suitable pull string in empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples.

J. Install expansion-deflection joints where conduit crosses building expansion or seismic joints.

K. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, provide fire-stop assembly with UL listed fire rating equal to wall or floor rating. Floor penetrations shall have fire-stopping assembly with appropriate “T” rating.

L. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise, route through roof jack with pitch pocket.

M. Conduit in Slabs above Grade: Not allowed except as specifically shown on Drawings.

N. Use PVC-coated rigid steel factory elbows for bends in plastic conduit runs longer than 100 feet, or in plastic conduit runs which have more than two bends regardless of length. Use PVC-coated rigid steel factory elbows for vertical bends and slab penetrations in plastic conduit runs.

O. Wipe plastic conduit clean and dry before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area that will be inserted into fitting. Let joint cure for 20 minutes minimum.

P. Final connections to electric motors and other vibration isolated equipment: use flexible liquid-tight conduit of sufficient length to provide right angle bend or 8 inch offset between motor or equipment and first rigid anchor point.

3.3 DUCTBANK

A. Install top of duct bank minimum 30 inches below finished grade.

B. Install conduit with minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet.

C. Terminate conduit in end bell at manhole entries.

D. Stagger conduit joints in concrete encasement 6 inches minimum vertically.

E. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4 feet on centers. Band conduit together with suitable banding devices. Securely anchor conduit to prevent movement during concrete placement.

F. Provide minimum 3 inch concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of duct bank.

G. Provide two No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in top of bank under paved areas.



3.4 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Underground Installations More than Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Plastic-coated rigid steel conduit or Schedule 40 plastic conduit (in concrete for conduit over 2 inch size).

B. Installations In or Under Concrete Slab, or Underground within Five Feet of Foundation Wall: Rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or Schedule 40 plastic conduit (in concrete for conduit over 2 inch size).

C. In Concrete (not allowed unless indicated on Drawings).

D. Exposed Outdoor Locations: Rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit.

E. Wet Interior Locations: Rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit.

F. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing.

G. Exposed Dry Interior Locations above 8 feet: Rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing.

H. Exposed Dry Interior Locations below 8 feet: Rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit.

3.5 RACEWAY INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Use flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level.

C. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.

D. Wireway Supports: Provide steel channel as specified in Section 26 05 29 – Hangers & Supports.

E. Close ends of wireway and unused conduit openings.

F. Ground and bond raceway and wireway under provisions of Section 26 05 26 – Grounding & Bonding.

G. Where wireways pass through walls or barriers, cut cover within two inches of either side of wall in order to minimize length of cover which cannot be opened.

3.6 BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.

B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance.

C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.

D. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.



E. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods under the provisions of Section 07 27 00.

F. Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices with each other.

G. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas.

H. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inch separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated and fire rated walls.

I. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.

J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

L. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.

N. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.

O. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.

P. Use 4-inch square box with plaster ring for single device outlets.

Q. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.

R. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations.

S. Set floor boxes level.

T. Large Pull Boxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches in volume, or 12 inches in any dimension. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged NEMA 1 enclosure. 2. Other Locations: Use surface-mounted cast metal box.

3.7 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with Section 08 31 00 – Access Doors and Panels.

B. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

C. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches and backsplashes.

D. Position outlet boxes to locate luminaries as shown on reflected ceiling plan.



3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material.

B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

C. Install knockout closure in unused box openings.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 260553-1 Identification for Electrical Systems

SECTION 260553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Nameplates and labels.

B. Wire and cable markers.

C. Conduit color coding.

D. Conduit markers.

E. Panelboard Directories.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 09 91 00 – Painting.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01 30 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Include data sheets for identification materials furnished.

C. Include schedule for nameplates and labels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Type NP: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, with white letters on black background.

2.2 LEGEND PLATES

A. Type LP: Die-stamped metal legend plate with mounting hole and positioning key.

B. Paint-fill engraved characters.

2.3 WIRE AND TERMINAL MARKERS

A. Self-adhering, pre-printed, self-laminating vinyl wrap-around strips.

B. Thomas & Betts WSL, Brady B191 series, or equal.



2.4 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT MARKERS

A. 6 inch wide, 4 mil yellow polyolefin tape, with permanent continuous black imprinting reading "Buried Electric Line" or "Buried High Voltage Line".

B. Reef Industries "Terra Tape", Thomas & Betts "WBT Protect-A-Line" or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines.

B. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets, or adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. Do not use tape for any application.

3.2 WIRE IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring.

B. Provide conductor phase color coding as per Section 26 05 19 – Power Wire & Cable.

3.3 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING

A. Provide type "NP" nameplates of minimum letter height as noted below: 1. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 1/4-inch to identify

equipment designation. 1/8-inch to identify voltage rating and source. 2. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches and Motor Starters in Panelboards,

Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 1/8-inch to identify circuit and load served, including location.

3. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8-inch to identify load served.

4. Transformers: 1/4-inch to identify equipment designation. 1/8-inch to identify primary and secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location.

5. Equipment Cabinets, Terminal Cabinets, Control Panels and other Cabinets enclosing apparatus: 3/8-inch to identify equipment and designation.

B. Provide type "LP" metal legend plates for attachment to panel mounted operator's devices such as pilot lights, push buttons, selector switches, etc.

3.4 CONDUIT COLOR CODING SCHEDULE

A. Coordinate color of paint with Section 09 91 00 – Painting to identifying conduit by system.

B. Fire Alarm System: Red.



3.5 PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES

A. Provide typewritten directories arranged in numerical order showing number of room in which each device served by each panelboard circuit is located.

B. Verify room numbers to be used with Owner. Room number will not necessarily be those used on the Drawings.

C. Mount directories in a 6 inch by 8 inch metal frame under a clear plastic cover inside each panelboard door.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 260800-1 Commissioning of Electrical Systems

SECTION 260800

COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes the requirements for start-up and commissioning for Division 26 and 28 installed work, including but not limited to: 1. Low voltage distribution system. 2. Emergency power system. 3. Fire alarm system.

1.2 COMMISSIONING

A. Power Commissioning: 1. Perform commissioning work after equipment is installed and system ready for

operation. 2. Perform commissioning work in accordance with Power Check Lists and equipment

manufacturer's standard procedures and check lists, including but not limited to: a. Verify test readings, such as:

1) Cable DC Hipot. 2) Ground fault protection. 3) Ground resistance. 4) Frequency. 5) Transformer heating. 6) Circuit breaker tripping.

b. Verify calibration of meters: 1) Kwhr meters. 2) Voltmeters. 3) Ammeters. 4) Frequency meters. 5) Circuit Breakers.

c. Verify operation of electronic power monitors. d. Verify that total power system is performing time delays outlined in the design

intent under part and full load conditions.

B. Fire Alarm System Commissioning: 1. Perform commissioning work after alarm equipment is installed and system ready for

operation. 2. Perform commissioning work in accordance to the manufacturer's standard

procedures and check lists, including but not limited to: a. Verify tests such as:

1) Alarm db. 2) Detectors initiating signal. 3) Trouble lights.

b. Verify settings of 1) Smoke detectors. 2) Heat detectors. 3) Duct detectors.

c. Verify readings of remote data, such as annunciator panel. d. Verify operation of system modes, such:


May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 260800-2 Commissioning of Electrical Systems

1) Elevator control. 2) Sprinkler supervisory alarm.

e. Verify that total alarm system is performing to provide conditions as outlined in the design intent.

C. Training: 1. At job completion, allot a period of not less than 24 hours for instruction of building,

operating and maintenance personnel in the use of all systems. Include high voltage safety training. This instruction time (24 hours) is in addition to any instruction time called out in other Division 26/28 Sections.

2. Instruct all personnel at the same time. Contractor responsible for coordinating factory representative arrangements.

3. Contractor responsible for training expenses incurred.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 262416-1 Panelboards

SECTION 262416

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Distribution Panelboards.

B. Branch Circuit Panelboards.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 09 91 00 – Painting: Touch-up of painted surfaces.

B. Section 26 09 13 – Electrical Power Monitoring & Control.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C12 – Code for Electricity Metering.

B. ANSI C57.13 – Requirements for Instrument Transformers.

C. NEMA AB 1 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers

D. NEMA PB 1 – Panelboards

E. NEMA PB 1.1 – Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.

F. NEMA PB 1.2 – Application Guide for Ground-fault Protective Devices for Equipment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Include front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; instrument details; instructions for handling and installation; and electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components.

C. Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker arrangement and sizes.

D. Submit manufacturer's instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures.



B. Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.


A. Deliver products to the site under provisions of Section 01 65 00 – Product Delivery Requirements.

B. Store and protect products under provision of Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements.

C. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

1.7 SPARE PARTS

A. Keys: Furnish 3 each to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Eaton (Cutler Hammer)

B. Schneider Electric (Square D)

C. General Electric

D. Or equal.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; circuit breaker type.

B. Panelboard Bus: Copper ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard.

C. Provide cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, screw cover, and hinged door with flush lock. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

D. Minimum fully rated Short Circuit Rating: 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt panelboards; 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards, or as shown on Drawings. No utility service installed as part of this scope.

E. Circuit breakers: provide molded case circuit breakers as specified in Section 26 28 16 – Switches & Circuit Breakers.

2.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB 1 circuit breaker type.

B. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1 for indoor locations.



C. Cabinet Size: 6 inches deep; 20 inches wide

D. Provide flush or surface cabinet front as shown on the Drawings with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

E. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide copper ground bus in all panelboards.

F. Minimum fully rated Short Circuit Rating: 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208 volt panelboards; 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards or as shown on Drawings. Coordinate available fault current with PG&E. No utility service installed as part of this scope.

G. Circuit breakers: provide molded case circuit breakers as specified in Section 26 28 16 – Switches & Circuit Breakers

2.4 SWITCHING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Provide circuit breakers in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 28 16 – Switches & Circuit Breakers. Fully rated short circuit interrupting capacity of all devices shall be no less than the withstand rating of the switchboard.

2.5 METERING

A. Provide metering at MCB capable of reporting: 1. Voltage 2. Current 3. kVA

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify surfaces are ready to receive Work.

B. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

C. Verify required utilities are available in proper location and ready for use.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards plumb in conformance with NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Height: Six feet to top.

C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.

D. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.




A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers.

B. Test panelboards in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 08 00 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems.

C. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for one minute each. Test voltage shall be 1000 volts, and minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 2 megohms.

D. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper balancing for multi-wire branch circuits.


A. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.

B. Adjust trip and time delay setting to values recommended in short circuit and coordination study.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 262726-1 Wiring Devices

SECTION 262726

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Wall switches.

B. Wall dimmers.

C. Receptacles.

D. Occupancy sensors.

E. Device plates and decorative box covers.

F. Floor box service fittings.

G. Poke-through service fittings.


A. Section 26 05 03 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) – Standard of Installation.

B. NEMA WD 1 – General Requirements for Wiring Devices.

C. NEMA WD 6 – Wiring Device – Dimensional Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.

C. Samples: Submit one sample of each type device and wall plate illustrating materials, construction, color and finish.

D. Submit a lighting plan clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product, location and orientation of each occupancy sensor.



1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL SWITCHES

A. Description: NEMA WD 1, heavy-duty, AC only general-use, quiet type snap switch with fast make-slow break, silver-cadmium oxide alloy contacts, side and back wired.

B. Device Body: White plastic with matching toggle handle.

C. Illuminated Handle Type Switch: Clear color handle.

D. Pilot Light: lighted handle type switch, red color handle.

E. Voltage Rating: 120-277 volts, A.C.

F. Current Rating: 20 amperes.

G. Manufacturers and Model Numbers: 1. Single-pole switch:

a. Hubbell No. HBL-1221 b. Pass & Seymour No. PS20AC1 c. Leviton No. 1221-2 d. Cooper Wiring Devices No. 2221 e. Or equal.

2. Double-pole switch: a. Hubbell No. HBL-1222 b. Pass & Seymour No. PS20AC2 c. Leviton No. 1222-2 d. Cooper Wiring Devices 2222 e. Or equal.

3. Three-way switch: a. Hubbell No. HBL-1223 b. Pass & Seymour No. PS20AC3 c. Leviton No. 1223-2 d. Cooper Wiring Devices 2223 e. Or equal.

4. Four-way switch: a. Hubbell No. HBL-1224 b. Pass & Seymour No. PS20AC4 c. Leviton No. 1224-2 d. Cooper Wiring Devices 2224 e. Or equal.

5. Pilot light handle indicator switch: a. Hubbell No. HBL-1221-PL for 120V b. Pass & Seymour No. PS20AC1-RPL for 120V c. Leviton No. 1221-PLR for 120V d. Cooper Wiring Devices 2221PL for 120V e. Or equal.



6. Illuminated handle – Locator switch: a. Hubbell No. HBL-1221-ILC b. Pass & Seymour No. PS20AC1-CSL c. Leviton No. 1221-LHC d. Cooper Wiring Devices 2221LTV e. Or equal.

7. Up-down control switch: 3-position, center off, momentary contact: a. Hubbell No. HBL-1557 b. Pass & Seymour No. 1251 c. Leviton No. 1257 d. Cooper Wiring Devices 1995V e. Or equal.

2.2 INCANDESCENT WALL DIMMERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Lutron "Nova T" series. 2. Leviton "81000" series. 3. Prescolite "Designer Line". 4. Or equal.

B. Description: NEMA WD 1; Semiconductor dimmer for incandescent lamps.

C. Device Body: White plastic with linear slide.

D. Voltage: 120 volts.

E. Power Rating: Match load shown on Drawings, 1000 watts minimum.

F. Accessory Wall Switch: Match dimmer appearance. 1. Lutron Model NT-1PS or NT-3PS. 2. Or equal.

2.3 RECEPTACLES

A. Description: NEMA WD1, heavy duty general-use receptacle.

B. Device Body: White plastic.

C. Configuration: NEMA WD6, type as specified and indicated.

D. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20R.

E. Ground Fault Interrupting (GFCI) Receptacle with LED indicating light, test and reset buttons.

F. Construction: 1. Nylon housing. 2. One-piece yoke and ground contact (except isolated ground type) made of heavy

gage brass. 3. Brass contacts. 4. Solid Center rivet. 5. Back and side wiring type.



G. Manufacturers and Model Number: 1. Duplex convenience receptacle:

a. Hubbell No. HBL5362 b. Pass & Seymour No. 5362-A c. Leviton No. 5362 d. Cooper Wiring Devices No.5362 e. Or equal.

2. GFCI receptacle: a. Hubbell No. GF-5362 b. Pass & Seymour No. 2094 c. Leviton No. 8898 d. Cooper Wiring Devices No. XGF20 e. Or equal.

3. Isolated ground convenience receptacle: a. Hubbell No. IG-5362 b. Pass & Seymour No. IG6300 c. Leviton No. 5362-IG d. Cooper Wiring Devices No. IG5362RN e. Or equal.

4. Surge suppressor convenience receptacle: a. Hubbell No. 5362-S b. Pass & Seymour No. 5362-SP c. Leviton No. 5380 d. Cooper Wiring Devices No. 5350BLS e. Or equal.

5. Tamper resistant receptacle: a. Hubbell No. HBLSG63H b. Pass & Seymour TR63-H c. Leviton No 5362-SG d. Cooper Wiring Devices No. TR8300 e. Or equal

6. Special receptacle: a. Type as identified by NEMA standard number on drawings.

2.4 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Provide multi-technology type sensors. Use self-contained sensors for wall applications. Use one or two-way sensors and switchpacks for ceiling applications. 1. Wall sensor: Use white plastic colored sensor that can be wired for single or two-

level control and operate at either 120 volt or 277 volt power. Provide 30 second to 30 minute adjustable off delay feature.

2. Ceiling sensor: Use white plastic colored sensor. Provide 30 second to 30 minute adjustable off delay feature.

B. Provide sensors system suitable for NEC 725 Class 2 wiring and use plenum rated cable where approved.

C. Wiring between sensors and controls units shall be class II, 18-24 AWG stranded U.L. certified, PVC insulated jacketed cable for use in plenums, where applicable.

D. All sensors shall provide a method of indication to verify that motion is being detected during testing and that the unit is working.

E. All sensors shall have no leakage current to load in manual or in Auto/Off mode for safety purposes and shall have voltage drop protection.



F. All sensors shall have UL rated, 94V-0 plastic enclosures.

G. Manufactures: 1. Lutron 2. Wattstopper 3. Hubbel 4. Novitas

2.5 WALL PLATES

A. Decorative Cover Plate: White smooth nylon. 1. Hubbell No. P Series 2. Pass & Seymour No. TP Series 3. Leviton No. 80000 series 4. Cooper Wiring Devices No. PJ Series 5. Or equal.

B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover. 1. Hubbell No. CWP8H 2. Bell No. 245-AL 3. Leviton No. 4970 4. Cooper Wiring Devices No. 989 5. Or equal.

2.6 FLOOR MOUNTED SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Flush Cover Fitting: 1. Hubbell Model S-3825 2. Steel City Model P-64-DS 3. Walker Model 827/828R 4. Or equal. 5. Material: Brass. 6. Configuration: Duplex flap opening.

2.7 POKE-THROUGH FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell No. PT7 Series 2. Steel City No. PT Series 3. Wiremold RC4 series 4. Or equal.

B. Description: Assembly comprising service fitting, poke-through component, firestops and smoke barriers, and junction box for conduit termination.

C. Fire Rating: 3 hours.

D. Service Fitting: 1. Type: Flush. 2. Housing: Satin aluminum. 3. Device Plate: Stainless steel. 4. Configuration: Two duplex and four communications outlet.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify conditions under provisions of Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height.

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify floor boxes are adjusted properly.

E. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

F. Verify openings in access floor are in proper locations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surfaces.

B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.

3.3 EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect abandoned wiring devices and remove them.

B. Ensure access to existing wiring devices which remain active. Modify installation as appropriate.

C. Clean and repair existing wiring devices which remain or are to be reinstalled.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with NECA “Standard of Installation”.

B. Install devices plumb and level.

C. Install switches with OFF position down.

D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer.

E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.

F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom or right-hand side.

G. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

H. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.

I. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. Stranded conductor may be used for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. However, if stranded conductors are



used in lieu of solid, then fork terminals shall be crimped on for all device terminations. Bare stranded conductors shall not be placed directly under the device screws.

J. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.

K. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.

L. Install identifying nameplate on all receptacles (including receptacles in equipment furnished by others) as per Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.


A. Inspect each wiring device for defects.

B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.

C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.

D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 262816-1 Switches & Circuit Breakers

sSECTION 262816

SWITCHES & CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Circuit breakers used in unit substations, panelboards and switchgear.

B. Individually enclosed circuit breakers.

C. Fused and unfused disconnect switches.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NECA "Standard of Installation"

B. NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000V maximum).

C. NEMA AB 1 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

D. NEMA SG 3 – Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers.

E. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.

F. ANSI/UL 198C – High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type.

G. ANSI/UL 198E – Class R Fuses.

H. NEMA KS 1 – Enclosed Switches..

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 11 16 – Secondary Unit Substations

B. Section 26 23 13 – Paralleling Low-voltage Switchgear

C. Section 26 24 00 – Switchboards & Panelboards

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with provisions of Section 013 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing ratings, trip units, time current curves, dimensions, and enclosure details.

C. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity, horsepower, and short circuit.




A. Perform work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

1.7 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish [3] [ ] of each size fuse to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS – CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Eaton (Cutler Hammer)


C. General Electric

D. Or equal.

2.2 POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. Air power circuit breaker meeting the requirements of NEMA SG 3.

B. Factory-assembled circuit breaker with stored energy mechanism and fully adjustable microprocessor based solid state trip unit. Breaker dual operated – either electrically or mechanically. Provide with electronic trip sensing, timing and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings, long-time pick-up and long-time delay, adjustable short time pickup and delay, and a local open and close button. Where ground fault protection is specified, the sensing shall be integral with the circuit breaker.

C. Power circuit breakers shall be mounted in switchboards in a draw-out configuration.

D. Terminals shall be rated for 75 degrees Centigrade minimum.

E. Fully rated short circuit interrupting capacity shall be minimum 65,000A, but no less than the withstand rating of the equipment that it is installed in, unless otherwise noted.

F. 30 cycle withstand rating shall be 65,000A, but no less than the withstand rating of the equipment that it is installed in, unless otherwise noted.

2.3 INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. NEMA AB 1 molded case circuit breaker, commonly classified by manufacturers as “insulated case” type.

B. Factory-assembled circuit breaker with two-step stored energy mechanism and fully adjustable microprocessor based solid state trip unit. Breaker dual operated – either electrically or mechanically. Provide with electronic trip sensing, timing and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings, long-time pick-up and long-time delay, instantaneous trip,



adjustable short time pickup and delay, and a local open and close button. Where ground fault protection is specified, the sensing shall be integral with the circuit breaker.

C. Insulated case breakers shall be fixed mounted type for feeder breakers in unit substations and draw out type in all other applications.

D. Terminals shall be rated for 75 degrees Centigrade minimum.

E. Fully rated short circuit interrupting capacity shall be minimum 65,000A, but no less than the withstand rating of the equipment that it is installed in, unless otherwise noted.

2.4 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type circuit breaker with trip sensor in each pole.

B. Circuit breakers with trip ratings over 100A shall have frame size minimum 225A.

C. Circuit breakers greater than 100A frame size shall have solid state trip units. Include ground fault trip where indicated.

D. For short circuit ratings, see specification section of equipment in which circuit breaker is installed.

E. Terminals shall be rated for 75 degree Centigrade minimum.

2.5 TRIP UNITS

A. Field-Adjustable Trip Circuit Breaker: Provide circuit breakers with frame sizes 800 amperes and larger with mechanism for adjusting long time continuous current setting for automatic operation.

B. Field-Changeable Ampere Rating Circuit Breaker: Provide circuit breakers with frame size 400 amperes and larger with changeable trip units.

C. Insulated case circuit breakers shall have metering capability with a display for voltage, current, power and energy readings.

2.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES

A. Provide accessories as indicated, to NEMA AB 1.

B. Shunt Trip Device: 120 volts.

C. Handle Lock: Include provisions for padlocking.

D. Provide mechanical trip device.

E. Provide Products suitable for use as service entrance equipment where so applied.

2.7 MANUFACTURERS – DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Eaton (Cutler-Hammer)




C. General Electric.

D. Or equal.

2.8 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD; quick make, quick break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: designed to accommodate Class [R] [J] fuses.]

B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD; quick make, quick break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.

C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1; Type 1 unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2.9 MANUFACTURERS – FUSES

A. Bussman

B. Ferraz-Shawmut

C. Or equal.

2.10 FUSES

A. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: [ANSI/UL 198C, Class J;] [ANSI/UL 198E, class [RK 1;] [RK 5;] sized as indicated on Drawings; [dual element,] [current limiting, [time delay] one-time fuse, [250] [600] volt.

B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.

2.11 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor application, Type 3R for outdoor application or as suitable for use where indicated.

B. Fabricate enclosure from steel.

C. Finish using manufacturer's standard enamel finish, gray color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed circuit breakers and disconnect switches where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29 – Hangers & Supports.

C. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.



D. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.

3.2 TESTING

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 26 08 00 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems.

B. Inspect and test each circuit breaker to NEMA AB 1or SG 5, as applicable.

C. Inspect each circuit breaker visually.

D. Perform several mechanical ON-OFF operations on each circuit breaker.

3.3 COMMISSIONING

A. Refer to Section 26 08 00 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems for system commissioning requirements.



May 2013: Permit/ Bid Set 265100-1 Interior Lighting

SECTION 265100

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

B. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, LEDs and ballasts. 1. Emergency lighting units. 2. Exit signs. 3. Lighting fixture supports. 4. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.

C. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting,

including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

B. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 1. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 2. Ballast, including BF. 3. Energy-efficiency data.



4. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Furnish data required in "Submittals" Article in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

5. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

6. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 7. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall

be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

C. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

E. Samples: For each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each Sample shall include the following:

F. Lamps and ballasts, installed. 1. Cords and plugs. 2. Pendant support system.

G. Installation instructions.

H. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

I. Lighting fixtures. 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the

plane of the luminaires. 3. Ceiling-mounted projectors. 4. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 5. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access panels. g. Photocells.

J. Perimeter moldings.



K. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

L. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.

M. Field quality-control reports.

N. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

O. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

P. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups complete with power and control connections.

E. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations. 1. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 2. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed

at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years. 1. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign

Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.



C. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

D. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: Three years from date of Substantial

Completion.

E. Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

F. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

G. Special Warranty for LED Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form made out to Owner and signed by fixture manufacturer agreeing to replace LED’s, drivers and the associated labor in the event of failure within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

H. Warranty Period for LED’s integral to fixture: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 1. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed.

Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Fluorescent-fixture-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 20 emergency

lighting units. 3. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of

each type. 4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at

least one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Refer to Light Fixture Schedule/Specification on sheet E5.01 following Part 3 of this section with manufacturer’s information and additional notes.

B. In other Part 2 articles and Lighting Fixture Schedule/Specification Sheets where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.



2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.

C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

D. White Light Emitting Diode (LED) Fixtures: UL or CE listed. Manufacturer shall ensure that products undergo and successfully meet appropriate design and manufacturability testing including Design FMEA, Process FMEA, Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests, IEC standards and UL/CE testing.

E. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.

F. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

G. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

H. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

I. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized.

J. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

K. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

L. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: 1. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. 2. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple,

etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

3. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

4. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

5. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. 6. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

M. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.



2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:

B. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 2. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level

control is indicated. 3. Sound Rating: Class A except Class B for T12/HO and T12/Slimline lamp ballasts. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or

better. 6. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.90 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 10. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and

shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

C. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.

D. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T8, T5 and T5HO Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following:

E. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 1. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.

F. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection.

G. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.

H. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field.

I. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

J. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens, unless otherwise indicated on lighting fixture specification sheets. When 1 percent dimming is indicated as required, ballast shall have a dimming range of 100 to 1 percent of rated lamp lumens. 1. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 2. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system

and lamp type indicated. 3. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast,

controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.

K. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

L. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. 1. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Low-Level Operation: 50 percent of rated lamp lumens, unless otherwise indicated.



M. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 1. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system

and lamp type indicated.

N. Disconnect Means.

O. Provide disconnecting means for fluorescent light fixtures using double ended lamps and containing ballasts that can be serviced in place or ballasted light fixtures supplied from multi-wire branch circuits. This applies for: 1. Areas with a single disconnect or lighting switch unless:

a. Bi-level switching is provided, which eliminates the need for a disconnecting means at every light fixture, or

b. If the room has only one light fixture, a local fixture disconnect is not required. 2. Light fixtures with multiple ballasts and multi-wire circuits. 3. Occupancy sensor controlled lighting without multiple override switches. 4. Remote lighting control without overrides within sight of the lighting.

P. Disconnect means is required internal or external to the fixture, for each fixture and in sight of the fixture. 1. Complete wiring disconnection including the ground wire is required for multi-wire

circuits to fixtures.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

B. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 1. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 2. Sound Rating: Class A. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or

better. 5. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 6. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 7. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 8. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.

2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.

B. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each, unless otherwise indicated. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 1. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 2. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture

or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal

power and demonstrates unit operability.



b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

C. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 1. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power

transfer relay. 2. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit

initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

3. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

D. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from lighting fixture. Comply with UL 924.

E. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 1. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp in a remote fixture

continuously. 2. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 3. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. 4. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 5. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power

and demonstrates unit operability. 6. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 7. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit



2.6 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

B. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 degrees F for single-lamp ballasts. 1. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 degrees F. 2. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 3. Sound Rating: Class A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or

better. 6. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 7. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. 8. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 9. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.



2.7 QUARTZ LAMP LIGHTING CONTROLLER

A. General Requirements for Controllers: Factory installed by lighting fixture manufacturer. Comply with UL 1598.

B. Standby (Quartz Restrike): Automatically switches quartz lamp on when a HID lamp in the fixture is initially energized and during the HID lamp restrike period after brief power outages.

C. Connections: Designed for a single branch -circuit connection.

D. Switching Off: Automatically switches quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output, unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

C. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, two for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp life. 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-

contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit

voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

D. Master/Remote Sign Configurations: 1. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, and

provide additional capacity in LED power supply, ballast and battery for power connection to remote unit.

2. Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, except omit power supply, battery, and test features. Arrange to receive full power requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently with master unit as a unified system.



E. Self-Luminous Signs: Powered by tritium gas, with universal bracket for flush-ceiling, wall, or end mounting. Signs shall be guaranteed by manufacturer to maintain the minimum brightness requirements in UL 924 for 20 years, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Self-Luminous Signs: Using strontium oxide aluminate compound to store ambient light and release the stored energy when the light is removed. Provide with universal bracket for flush-ceiling, wall, or end mounting.

2.9 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

B. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 1. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

3. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

4. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

5. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 6. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power

is restored after an outage. 7. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit



2.10 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 36,000 hours as rated for 12 hour start, unless otherwise indicated.

B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

C. T5 rapid-start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3000 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

D. T5HO rapid-start, high-output lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.



E. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated. Lamp shall be suitable for use with dimming ballasts if specified.

F. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 1. 18 W: GU24 twister, soft white, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 25 W: PL-L 2G11 twin tube, rated 2600 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 6. 57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum). 7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).

2.11 HID LAMPS

A. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 3000 K.

2.12 LIGHT EMITTING DIODES

A. 80+ CRI. Chromaticity Tolerance shall be no more than 0.03 on the CIE chromaticity diagram from the black body curve.

B. 50,000 hours with 70 percent Lumen maintenance (per IES LM-80-08).

C. The LED system shall use high-speed pulse width modulation (PWM) for dimming.

D. LED system shall use 16-bit or greater nonlinear scaling techniques for high-resolution output.

E. All hardwired connections to LED fixtures shall be reverse polarity protected and provide high voltage protection in the event connections are reversed or shorted during the installation process.

F. Power/data supply outputs shall have current limiting protection. Power/data supply shall provide miswiring protection.

G. Power/data supply shall have power factor correction.

2.13 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gauge, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gauge, unless otherwise indicated.



F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

2.14 RETROFIT KITS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Reflector Kit: UL 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four-lamp, surface-mounted or recessed lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces.

B. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast, lamps, and sockets.

2.15 REQUIREMENTS FOR INDIVIDUAL LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Refer to Light Fixture Schedule/Specification sheets following Part 3 of this section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

B. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install lamps in each luminaire.

C. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

D. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.

E. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

F. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture, unless otherwise indicated. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners. 1. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each

fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. 2. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling

plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

3. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

G. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

H. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 1. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.



2. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

3. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

J. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures under supervision of Lighting Consultant as designated by Architect. Contractor shall coordinate meeting time for aiming at night with Lighting Consultant and a work crew as determined necessary by lighting Consultant. All required equipment shall be available for aiming, including ladders or other lift equipment, and lamps and accessories as specified.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements in NFPA 101.

C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 3 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.

B. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect and Lighting Designer.


030130 Concrete Canopy Repair - San Franciscomission.sfgov.org/OCA_BID_ATTACHMENTS/FA31229.pdf ·...

Documents

Transcript of 030130 Concrete Canopy Repair - San Franciscomission.sfgov.org/OCA_BID_ATTACHMENTS/FA31229.pdf ·...